WO2018188185A1 - Switching method and switching apparatus for remote device between relay devices - Google Patents

Switching method and switching apparatus for remote device between relay devices Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018188185A1
WO2018188185A1 PCT/CN2017/087796 CN2017087796W WO2018188185A1 WO 2018188185 A1 WO2018188185 A1 WO 2018188185A1 CN 2017087796 W CN2017087796 W CN 2017087796W WO 2018188185 A1 WO2018188185 A1 WO 2018188185A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
relay device
relay
request message
base station
core network
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2017/087796
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
杨皓睿
何岳
金辉
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2018188185A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018188185A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/03Reselecting a link using a direct mode connection
    • H04W36/033Reselecting a link using a direct mode connection in pre-organised networks
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/08Reselecting an access point

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a method and a switching device for a remote device to switch between relay devices.
  • a smart watch with a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card can be directly connected to the network to make a call.
  • SIM Subscriber Identity Module
  • the battery of the wearable device is small, resulting in short standby time; the antenna design of the wearable device is difficult, and only a single antenna can be realized at present, so it takes more time and network resources to transmit data.
  • the wearable device is connected to the network through the surrounding relay device, so that the power of the wearable device can be saved and the transmission efficiency can be improved.
  • the relay device can be a mobile phone.
  • the wearable device accesses the network through the relay device, the wearable device functions as a remote device, and the relay device transmits uplink and downlink data and signaling to the wearable device.
  • the wearable device can be directly connected to the base station through a direct connection path; or can be connected to the base station through an indirect path, that is, connected to the base station through the relay device.
  • the wearable device needs to switch from the original relay device to the new relay in order to continue to save its own power.
  • the device that is, the path switch between the two relay devices. Assuming that the wearable device is currently accessing the network through the relay device 1, it needs to be switched to access the network through the relay device 2.
  • the relay device 1 and the relay device 2 may belong to the same base station management, and may also belong to different base station management.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of switching between the relay device 1 and the relay device 2 belonging to the same base station management
  • FIG. 2 is a relay device 1 and The relay device 2 belongs to a handover diagram managed by different base stations.
  • one way for a wearable device to switch between relay devices is as follows. After the wearable device accesses the network through the relay device, the wearable device periodically detects the signal quality of the PC5 link. When the wearable device finds that the signal quality of the PC5 is lower than the set threshold, the wearable device is centered. After the device initiates the request of the directly connected base station, the base station sends a Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection reconfiguration message to the wearable device after receiving the request forwarded by the relay device, and informs the wearable device that the base station needs to directly connect to the base station.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the configuration of the Radio Bearer (RB) enables the wearable device to connect directly to the base station.
  • the wearable device After receiving the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the wearable device disconnects the PC5 link of the relay device and establishes a Uu link with the base station.
  • the base station initiates a request to access the network through the new relay device.
  • the base station switches the wearable device from the direct connection path to an indirect path to access the network through the new relay device.
  • the wearable device needs to perform the process of switching from the indirect path to the direct path and the direct path to the indirect path during the process of performing the handover between the relay devices, which is complicated and wastes signaling and power.
  • the present invention provides a method for switching between remote devices and a switching device, which is used to solve the problem that the remote device switches between the relay devices is complicated and the signaling overhead is large.
  • the first aspect provides a method for the remote device to switch between the relay devices, where the remote device connects to the network through the first relay device, and if the network device is found to be connected to the first relay device during the network connection If the signal quality is lower than the set threshold, the switching between the relay devices is implemented by the following method. It is assumed that the remote device obtains the first identifier of the second relay device in advance, and the remote device sends a request message to the base station by using the first relay device, and the first identifier and the indication information are carried in the request message.
  • the request message is used to request the base station to switch the remote device from the first relay device to the network by using the first relay device
  • the second relay device is connected to the network; the remote device receives the response message for the request message returned by the base station, and establishes a connection with the second relay device based on the response message, thereby implementing Switching to the network by the second relay device is switched by connecting the network through the first relay device.
  • the request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell, where the second identifier is used by the base station to determine a serving base station of the second relay device Whether it is the base station.
  • the second identifier is further configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the core network device to which the second relay device belongs is located at the second relay device Paging in the reserved cell. This can save the paging of the network resources and radio resources of the second relay device.
  • the remote device after receiving the request message from the first relay device to the base station, the remote device receives a response message sent by the base station, and the remote device finds that the response message includes the And indicating, according to the indication information, the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is a side link between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the first relay device.
  • the second aspect provides a method for the remote device to switch between the relay devices.
  • the first base station receives the first request message sent by the remote device by using the first relay device, parses the first request message, and finds the first The first identifier of the second relay device carried in the request message and the indication information for identifying the handover between the relay devices, according to the first request message, the remote device is passed by the first relay The device connection network switches to connect to the network by the second relay device. In this way, the process of the remote device is prevented from being complicated and wastes signaling and power when performing the process of switching between the relay devices. By directly switching between the two relay devices, the continuity of the service of the remote device is ensured, and the saving is saved. Signaling consumption and saving power consumption.
  • the first request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell; the second identifier is used by the first base station to determine the second relay Whether the serving base station of the device is the first base station.
  • the second identifier is further configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the core network device to which the second relay device belongs is located in the second relay device. Paging in the reserved cell. This can save the paging of the network resources and radio resources of the second relay device.
  • the first base station switches the remote device from being connected to the network by the first relay device to the network connected by the second relay device according to the first request message.
  • the method is as follows: the first base station sends a second request message to the first core network device, where the second request message carries: from the a first identifier of the second relay device received in a request message and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the far The end device will be switched by the first relay device connection network to be connected to the network by the second relay device; or the first base station sends the second request message to the first core network device, by The first core network device sends a third request message to the second core network device, where the third request message includes: the first identifier of the second relay device received from the second request message And indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the indication information indicating the second core network device: the remote device is to be switched by the first relay device connection network to the second The relay device is
  • the first request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell; if the first base station is according to the second relay device camping cell
  • the second mapping determines that the serving base station of the second relay device is the first base station, and the first base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: the remote end a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is a side chain between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the second relay device a mapping relationship of the path bearer identifiers; or, if the first base station determines that the serving base station of the second relay device is not the first base station according to the second identifier of the second relay device camping cell,
  • the second request message further includes the first mapping relationship, where the second base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship.
  • the third aspect provides a method for the remote device to switch between the relay devices.
  • the remote device connects to the network through the first relay device, and the signal quality between the first relay device and the first relay device is low during the connection between the networks.
  • Sending a request message to the second relay device where the request message carries an identifier of the remote device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, and is characterized by the indication information.
  • the remote device switches between the relay devices; the request message is used to request the second relay device to initiate a request to the network, to connect the remote device by using the first relay device.
  • the network switches to connect to the network by the second relay device.
  • the remote device receives the response message sent by the base station, and establishes a connection with the second relay device based on the response message, so that the network is switched to the second relay device by connecting the network through the first relay device. Connect Network.
  • the process of the remote device is prevented from being complicated and wastes signaling and power when performing the process of switching between the relay devices.
  • the continuity of the service of the remote device is ensured, and the saving is saved. Signaling consumption and saving power consumption. .
  • the response message includes indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, and after receiving the response message sent by the base station, the remote device multiplexes the first mapping according to the response message.
  • the second mapping relationship is: the mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is The mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device is used to facilitate the switching by directly multiplexing the mapping relationship.
  • the fourth aspect provides a method for the remote device to switch between the relay devices, where the remote device connects to the network through the first relay device, and the second relay device receives the first request message sent by the remote device.
  • the first request message includes: an identifier of the remote device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the second relay device sends the network to the network according to the first request message.
  • a request is initiated to switch the remote device from being connected to the network by the first relay device to the network connected by the second relay device. In this way, the process of the remote device is prevented from being complicated and wastes signaling and power when performing the process of switching between the relay devices. By directly switching between the two relay devices, the continuity of the service of the remote device is ensured, and the saving is saved. Signaling consumption and saving power consumption.
  • the Two relay devices to the second core The network device sends a second request message, where the second request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the first request message, and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices;
  • the second request message is used by the second core network device to send a third request message to the first core network device, where the third request message includes: the far received from the second request message.
  • the identifier of the end device and the indication information for identifying the handover between the relay devices the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device is to be switched by connecting the network through the first relay device Connecting to the network by the second relay device; or, if the first relay device serving the second relay device and the core network device serving the second relay device are both the first core network device, the second middle The device sends the second request message to the first core network device, where the second request message
  • the fifth aspect provides a method for the remote device to switch between the relay devices, where the remote device connects to the network through the first relay device, and the core network device that serves the first relay device is the first core.
  • a network device where the core network device serving the second relay device is the second core network device, and the second core network device receives the second request message sent by the second relay device after receiving the first request message.
  • the second request message includes an identifier of the remote device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the second core network device sends a third request message to the first core network device.
  • the third request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the second request message, and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the indication information is used to indicate
  • the first core network device the remote device will be switched by the first relay device connection network to be connected to the network by the second relay device; if the first relay device and the service are served Two relay settings
  • the core network device is the first core network device, and the first core network device receives the second request message sent by the second relay device after receiving the first request message, and the second request message
  • the identifier of the remote device and the indication information for identifying the handover between the relay devices are included; the first core network device sends a fourth request message to the serving base station of the second relay device, where the The fourth request message is used to indicate the serving base station of the second relay device: the first mapping relationship is obtained, and the first mapping relationship is multiplexed to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: the remote device a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier and the side link bearer
  • the process of the remote device is prevented from being complicated and wastes signaling and power when performing the process of switching between the relay devices.
  • the continuity of the service of the remote device is ensured, and the saving is saved.
  • Signaling consumption and saving power consumption By directly multiplexing the mapping relationships, it helps to speed up the switch.
  • the second core network device after the second core network device sends a third request message to the first core network device, the second core network device receives a response message returned by the first core network device, where The second core network device sends a fifth request message to the serving base station of the second relay device, where the fifth request message includes an identifier of the second relay device, and an identifier of the second relay device For indicating the serving base station: the remote device will switch to connect to the network by the second relay device.
  • a switching apparatus for use in a remote device having a function of implementing the behavior of the remote device in any of the possible aspects of the first aspect and the first aspect described above.
  • the functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the structure of the apparatus includes a transceiver and a processor, wherein the processor is used for tuning
  • a set of programs is used to perform the methods described in the first aspect and any of the possible designs of the first aspect.
  • a handover apparatus for use in a first base station, the apparatus having the functionality to implement the behavior of the first base station in any of the possible aspects of the second aspect and the second aspect described above.
  • the functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the structure of the apparatus includes a transceiver and a processor, wherein the processor is configured to invoke a set of programs to perform as described in any of the possible designs of the second and second aspects above Methods.
  • a switching apparatus for use in a remote device having a function of implementing remote device behavior in any of the possible aspects of the third aspect and the third aspect described above.
  • the functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the structure of the apparatus includes a transceiver and a processor, wherein the processor is configured to invoke a set of programs to perform as described in any of the possible designs of the third and third aspects above Methods.
  • a switching apparatus for use in a second relay device having a function of implementing remote device behavior in any of the possible aspects of the fourth aspect and the fourth aspect described above.
  • the functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the structure of the apparatus includes a transceiver and a processor, wherein the processor is configured to invoke a set of programs to perform as described in any of the possible designs of the fourth and fourth aspects above Methods.
  • a switching apparatus for use in a second core network device, the apparatus having a function of implementing the behavior of the second core network device in any of the possible aspects of the fifth aspect and the fifth aspect.
  • the functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the structure of the apparatus includes a transceiver and a processor, wherein the processor is configured to invoke a set of programs to perform as described in any of the possible designs of the fifth and fifth aspects above Methods.
  • a computer storage medium for storing a computer program, the computer program comprising instructions for performing the methods of the various aspects.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product comprising instructions, which when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method described in the above aspects.
  • FIG. 1 is a structural diagram of a communication system in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for switching a remote device between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a remote device switching between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 4 is a second schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a remote device switching between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 5 is a third schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a remote device switching between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 6 is a second schematic flowchart of a method for switching a remote device between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 7 is a fourth schematic flowchart of a method for switching a remote device between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 8 is a fifth schematic flowchart of a method for switching a remote device between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a method for switching a remote device between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 to FIG. 14 are schematic structural diagrams of a switching device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a remote device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station in an embodiment of the present application.
  • 17 is a second schematic structural diagram of a remote device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of a relay device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a core network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1 is a structural diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system includes a remote device 101, at least one relay device 102, at least one base station 103, and a core network 104.
  • the core network 104 includes at least one mobility management entity (MME), a serving gateway (Serving GW, S-GW), a packet data gateway (PDN GW, P-GW), and a proximity service function entity (ProSe Function). , PF).
  • MME mobility management entity
  • S-GW serving gateway
  • PDN GW packet data gateway
  • P-GW Packe Function
  • PF proximity service function entity
  • Communication between the remote device 101 and the relay device 102 is through a PC5 link.
  • the relay device 102 refers to a device that can assist the remote device 101 to access the network.
  • the relay device 102 can relay uplink and downlink data and signals for the remote device 101. make.
  • the relay device 102 may be a device with higher performance than the remote device 101.
  • the remote device 101 may be a wearable device, and the relay device 102 may be a smart device such as a smart phone or a smart tablet.
  • the remote device 101 can perform uplink and downlink communication with the base station 103 through a direct path or an indirect path.
  • the remote device 101 When the remote device 101 communicates with the base station 103 through the indirect path, the remote device 101 sends uplink and downlink data and signaling to the base station 103 through the relay device 102, and both the remote device 101 and the relay device 102 need to pass the data radio bearer.
  • Data Radio Bearer DRB
  • DRB Data Radio Bearer
  • the base station 103 allocates a layer 2 identity (ID) to the remote device 101 in advance. That is, the layer 2 ID or the L2 ID carries the L2 ID in the data packet of the remote device 101, and the L2 ID is used to distinguish the data packet from the relay device 102.
  • ID layer 2 identity
  • the base station 103 allocates a corresponding side link bearer ID (SLBI) to an Evolved Packet System (EPS) bearer of the remote device 101.
  • SLBI side link bearer ID
  • EPS Evolved Packet System
  • the EPS bearer is the entire bearer of the wearable device to the P-GW.
  • the remote device Assuming that the remote device is currently connected to the network through the first relay device, the remote device periodically checks the signal quality of the PC5 link with the first relay device, and if the remote device determines the relationship with the first relay device. If the signal quality of the PC5 link is lower than the threshold, the trigger is switched from connecting the network through the first relay device to connecting to the network through the second relay device.
  • the specific conversion method is as shown in FIG. 2 or FIG. 6. 2 is a remote device initiating a handover request by using a first relay device, and FIG. 6 is a remote device initiating a handover request by using a second relay device.
  • the core network device may be an MME or other entity having mobility management functions.
  • Step 201 The remote device connects to the network through the first relay device.
  • Step 202 The remote device acquires a first identifier of the second relay device.
  • Step 203 The remote device sends a first request message to the first base station by using the first relay device, where the first base station receives the first request message sent by the remote device by using the first relay device.
  • the first base station is a serving base station of the first relay device, and if the serving core network devices of the first relay device and the second relay device are both the first core network device, step 204a is performed; Service core network equipment is the first core The heart network device, the service core network device of the second relay device is the second core network device, and step 204b is performed.
  • the first request message includes a first identifier and indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the remote device switches between the relay devices, and the first request message is used to request the base station to connect the remote device by using the first relay device.
  • the network switches to connect to the network through the second relay device.
  • the first request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell, where the second identifier is used by the first base station to determine whether the serving base station of the second relay device is the first base station.
  • the first base station After the first base station receives the first request message sent by the remote device by using the first relay device, if the first base station determines, according to the second identifier of the second relay device, the serving base station of the second relay device is the first The base station, the first base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the first relay device, and the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device;
  • the second request message sent in the following step 204a or step 204b carries the foregoing A mapping relationship is used by the second base station to multiplex the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship.
  • the bearer identifier of the remote device may be an EPS bearer ID in the 4G, or may be a quality of service flow (QoS ID) in the 5G, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • QoS ID quality of service flow
  • the first base station After receiving the first request message, the first base station switches the remote device from the first relay device connection network to the second relay device to connect to the network according to the first request message. Specifically, it is achieved by the following steps.
  • Step 204 The first base station sends a second request message to the first core network device.
  • the second request message includes: a first identifier of the second relay device received from the first request message, and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device : The remote device will switch from connecting to the network through the first relay device to the network through the second relay device.
  • the second request message further includes: a second identifier of the second relay device camped cell received from the first request message.
  • the second identifier is configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the first core network device performs paging in the second relay device camping cell. This can save the paging of the network resources and radio resources of the second relay device.
  • the second request message further includes: a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device received from the first request message and the side link bearer identifier between the first relay device.
  • Step 204b The first base station sends a second request message to the first core network device, and the first core network device sends a third request message to the second core network device.
  • the third request message includes: a first identifier of the second relay device received from the second request message and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the indication information indicates the second core network device: the remote end The device will switch from connecting to the network through the first relay device to the network through the second relay device.
  • the third request message further includes: a first mapping relationship received from the second request message, where the first mapping relationship is a bearer identifier of the remote device and a side link bearer identifier between the first relay device. Mapping relationship.
  • the third request message further includes: a second identifier of the second relay device camped cell received from the second request message.
  • the second identifier is configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the second core network device performs paging in the second relay device camping cell. This can save the paging of the network resources of the second relay device.
  • Step 205 The first base station returns a response message for the first request message to the remote device, where the remote device receives the response message sent by the base station for the first request message.
  • the response message includes the foregoing indication information, and the remote device may multiplex the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the indication information, where the first mapping relationship is a side link between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the first relay device.
  • a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier and the second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
  • Step 206 The remote device establishes a connection with the second relay device based on the received response message.
  • switching is made by connecting the network through the first relay device to connecting to the network through the second relay device.
  • Application scenario 1 The first relay device is the same as the serving base station of the second relay device, and is the first base station, and the service core network devices of the first relay device and the second relay device are also the same, and are the first core network. device.
  • the specific signaling interaction process is shown in Figure 3.
  • Step 301 The second relay device broadcasts a discovery message, and the remote device receives the discovery message.
  • the discovery message includes an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) E-UTRAN global identifier (ECGI) of the evolved second camping device.
  • E-UTRAN Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • ECGI Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • the discovery message also includes a Global Unique Temporary Identity (GUTI) assigned by the core network device to the second relay device.
  • GTI Global Unique Temporary Identity
  • the remote device acquires the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device and the GUTI of the second relay device included in the discovery message.
  • Step 302 The remote device sends a first request message to the first base station by using the first relay device.
  • the first request message may also be referred to as a first handover request (HO request).
  • the first request message includes indication information.
  • the indication information may also be referred to as a relay switch indication (Relay Switch Indication), for indicating that the request message is used for requesting handover between the relay devices.
  • the first request message further includes an ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device and a GUTI of the second relay device.
  • Step 303 The first base station sends a second request message to the first core network device.
  • the second request message can also be the second handover request.
  • the second request message includes indication information obtained from the first request message.
  • the second request message may further include an identifier of the remote device, where the identifier of the remote device is allocated by the first base station to the remote device.
  • the second request message may further include a GUTI of the second relay device and an ECGI of the cell currently camped by the second relay device.
  • Step 304 The first core network device authenticates and authorizes whether the remote device accesses the network through the second relay device.
  • the first core network device determines, according to the indication information, that the remote device needs to access the network through the second relay device.
  • the first core network device obtains an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) of the remote device according to the identifier allocated by the first base station for the remote device, and obtains the second relay device according to the GUTI of the second relay device. IMSI.
  • the first core network device performs authentication and authorization on whether the remote device accesses the network through the second relay device according to the IMSI of the remote device and the IMSI of the second relay device, and if the authentication and authorization are passed, the following is performed. step.
  • IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
  • step 305-310 if the second relay device is in the idle state, perform steps 305-310; otherwise, perform step 311 directly.
  • Step 305 The first core network device queries, according to the IMSI of the second relay device, that the second relay device is in an idle state, and determines, according to the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device, the current serving base station of the second relay device.
  • the current serving base station of the second relay device is the first base station.
  • the first core network device sends a paging message to the first base station, and the paging message carries the paging ID of the second relay device and the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device.
  • the paging ID of the second relay device may be an EPS system temporary mobile subscriber identity (EPS TMSI, S-TMSI) allocated by the core network device, or an IMSI of the second relay device.
  • EPS TMSI EPS system temporary mobile subscriber identity
  • Step 306 The first base station determines, according to the ECGI in the Paging message, that the second relay device is currently in the cell, and then pages the second relay device in the cell range.
  • Step 307 After receiving the paging message, the second relay device sends a service request to the first core network device.
  • Step 308 The first core network device sends an initial context setup request (Initial Context Setup Request) to the first base station.
  • the initial context setting request includes a context of the second relay device, such as an EPS bearer ID, a QoS, an S-GW address, and the like.
  • Step 309 The first base station establishes a context of the second relay device, and establishes an RB with the second relay device.
  • Step 310 The first base station sends an initial context setup complete (Initial Context Setup Complete) to the first core network device.
  • Step 311 The first core network device returns a handover request response message (Handover Request ack) to the first base station.
  • the handover request response message indicates that the first base station can switch the remote device to the second relay device, and the handover request response message includes an identifier that is allocated by the first base station to the second relay device, where the identifier is used to indicate the remote end of the first base station.
  • the relay device to which the device is to be switched is the second relay device.
  • Step 312 The first base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, and allocates a new L2 ID to the remote device, and establishes a bearer identifier corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device and a side link bearer of the second relay device.
  • the mapping relationship of the identity The mapping relationship of the identity.
  • the first mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is the side link between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the second relay device.
  • the mapping relationship of the bearer identifier is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is the side link between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the second relay device.
  • the first mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the first relay device
  • the second mapping relationship is a mapping between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay device.
  • the mapping between the EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device and the DRB ID of the second relay device is established by assigning a new L2 ID to the remote device.
  • Step 313 The first base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguration (RRC Conreconf) message to the second relay device, and the second relay device returns an RRC Connection Complete message.
  • RRC Conreconf RRC Connection Reconfiguration
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to notify the second relay device that it is a relay device of the remote device.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message may further include an L2 ID of the remote device, a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI of the second relay device, an EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device, and the second middle Following the mapping relationship of the DRB ID of the device.
  • Step 313b The first base station sends the RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first relay device, to notify the first relay device to delete the related configuration that is relayed to the remote device.
  • step 313a and step 313b are not limited herein, or step 313a and step 313b may be performed in parallel.
  • the first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the remote device, to notify the remote device to switch to the second relay device.
  • the first base station carries the following at least one type of information in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device: the indication information, the related configuration of the side link bearer identifier between the remote device and the second relay device, and the remote device.
  • the indication information is used to notify the remote device that the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to implement handover between the relay devices. If the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device does not change, the first base station does not carry the mapping relationship in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device. .
  • Step 314 The remote device sends an indirect connection release (Direct Link Release) message to the first relay device, where the first relay device disconnects the PC5 connection with the first relay device, and the first relay device returns an indirect connection release to the remote device. Response response.
  • indirect connection release Direct Link Release
  • Step 315 The remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, and the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
  • Step 316 The remote device establishes a PC5 connection with the second relay device.
  • Step 317 The remote device sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) message to the first base station, to notify the first base station that the handover is complete.
  • RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete
  • the above method can save the signaling consumption of the remote device switching between the relay devices, and the remote device switches to another indirect path through an indirect path, and the remote device during the handover process
  • the connection is not disconnected, and the base station is connected through the indirect path to ensure the continuity of the service of the remote device.
  • the paging of the second relay device to the specific cell under the designated base station by the core network device saves the paging of the network resource of the second relay device.
  • Application scenario 2 the serving base station of the first relay device is the first base station, and the serving base station of the second relay device is the second base station, and the serving core network devices of the first relay device and the second relay device are also the same.
  • the first core network device, the specific signaling interaction process is shown in FIG. 4 .
  • Steps 401 to 402 are the same as steps 301 to 302, and the repeated descriptions are not described herein again.
  • Step 403 The first base station sends a second request message to the first core network device.
  • the second request message can also be the second handover request.
  • the second request message includes indication information obtained from the first request message.
  • the second request message may further include an identifier of the remote device, where the identifier of the remote device is allocated by the first base station to the remote device.
  • the second request message may further include a GUTI of the second relay device and an ECGI of the cell currently camped by the second relay device.
  • the first base station determines that the serving base station of the second relay device is not the first base station according to the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device, and therefore, the first base station sends the second request message to the first core network device. Also included is a source to target container that includes the context of the remote device in the first base station.
  • the context of the remote device needs to be forwarded to the second base station by the core network device.
  • Step 404 The first core network device authenticates and authorizes whether the remote device accesses the network through the second relay device.
  • the specific process is the same as step 304, and details are not described herein again.
  • step 411 directly.
  • Step 405 The first core network device queries, according to the IMSI of the second relay device, that the second relay device is in an idle state, and determines, according to the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device, the current serving base station of the second relay device.
  • the current serving base station of the second relay device is the second base station.
  • the first core network device only sends a paging message to the second base station, where the paging message carries the paging ID of the second relay device and the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device.
  • the paging ID of the second relay device may be an EPS system temporary mobile subscriber identity (EPS TMSI, S-TMSI) allocated by the core network device, or an IMSI of the second relay device.
  • EPS TMSI EPS system temporary mobile subscriber identity
  • Step 406 The second base station determines, according to the ECGI in the Paging message, that the second relay device is currently in the cell, and then pages the second relay device in the cell range.
  • Step 407 After receiving the paging message, the second relay device returns a service request to the first core network device.
  • Step 408 The first core network device sends an initial context setup request (Initial Context Setup Request) to the second base station.
  • the initial context setting request includes a context of the second relay device, such as an EPS bearer ID, a QoS, an S-GW address, and the like.
  • Step 409 The second base station establishes a context of the second relay device, and establishes an RB with the second relay device.
  • Step 410 The second base station sends an initial context setup complete (Initial Context Setup Complete) to the first core network device.
  • Step 411 The first core network device returns a handover request message (Handover Request) to the second base station.
  • the handover request response message indicates that the second base station can switch the remote device to the second relay device, and the handover request response message includes the identifier allocated by the first core network device for the remote device, and the second base station allocates the identifier for the second relay device.
  • logo The handover request response message may also include a Source to target container.
  • the handover request response message may also include indication information.
  • the identifier allocated by the second base station to the second relay device is used to indicate that the second relay device switches to the handover between the relay devices instead of switching from the indirect path to the direct path (ie, the remote device from the indirect path) Connect the network to switch to the direct path connection network).
  • Step 412 The second base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the context of the remote device in the Source to Target Container, where the first mapping relationship is between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the first relay device.
  • the mapping relationship between the SLBI and the second mapping relationship is the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay devices.
  • the second base station allocates a new L2 ID to the remote device, and establishes a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device and the DRB ID of the second relay device.
  • Step 413 The second base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguration (RRC Conreconf) message to the second relay device, and the second relay device returns an RRC Connection Complete message.
  • RRC Conreconf RRC Connection Reconfiguration
  • the RRC ConReconf is used to notify the second relay device that it is a relay device of the remote device.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message may further include an L2 ID of the remote device, a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI of the second relay device, an EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device, and the second middle Following the mapping relationship of the DRB ID of the device.
  • Step 414 The second base station sends a handover request response (HO request ack) to the first core network device, to notify the first core network device that the handover preparation is complete, and the remote device can access the network through the second relay device.
  • HO request ack handover request response
  • the HO request ack includes a Target to source container, and the container includes an L2 ID assigned by the second base station to the remote device, and a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay device.
  • Step 415 The first core network device sends a handover command (HO Command) to the first base station, and notifies the first base station that the handover preparation for the remote device has been completed.
  • HO Command handover command
  • the switch command includes a Target to source container.
  • Step 416 The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first relay device, to notify the first relay device to delete the related configuration that is relayed to the remote device.
  • Step 416b The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the remote device, to notify the remote device to switch to the second relay device.
  • the first base station may carry at least one of the following information in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device: the indication information, the related configuration of the side link bearer identifier between the remote device and the second relay device, and the remote device
  • the indication information is used to notify the remote device that the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to implement handover between the relay devices. If the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device does not change, the first base station does not carry the mapping relationship in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device. .
  • steps 416a and 416b are not limited herein, or steps 416a and 416b may be performed in parallel.
  • Step 417 The remote device sends an indirect connection release (Direct Link Release) message to the first relay device, where the first relay device disconnects the PC5 connection with the first relay device, and the first relay device returns an indirect connection release to the remote device. Response response.
  • indirect connection release Direct Link Release
  • Step 418 The remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, and the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
  • Step 419 The remote device establishes a PC5 connection with the second relay device.
  • Step 420 The remote device sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) message to the second base station, to notify the second base station that the handover is complete.
  • RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete
  • the above method can save the signaling consumption of the remote device switching between the relay devices, and the remote device switches to another indirect path through an indirect path, and the remote device is in the process of switching.
  • the device is not disconnected, and the base station is connected through an indirect path to ensure the continuity of the remote device service.
  • the paging of the second relay device to the specific cell under the designated base station by the core network device saves the paging of the network resource of the second relay device.
  • Application scenario 3 the serving base station of the first relay device is the first base station, the serving base station of the second relay device is the second base station, and the serving core network device of the first relay device is the first core network device, and the second The service core network device of the device is the second core network device.
  • the specific signaling interaction process is shown in Figure 5.
  • Steps 501 to 503 are the same as steps 401 to 403, and the repeated descriptions are not described herein again.
  • Step 504 The first core network device sends a third request message to the second core network device.
  • the first core network device obtains the IMSI of the remote device from the second request message, and determines that the serving core network device of the second relay device is not the first core network device according to the GUTI of the second relay device, and then The core network device sends a third request message to the second core network device according to the GUTI of the second relay device, where the third request message is included in the packet At least one of the following: the indication information obtained from the second request message, the IMSI of the remote device, the GUTI of the second relay device, the ECGI currently hosted by the second relay device, the Source to target container, the first core The context of the remote device within the network device.
  • Step 505 The second core network device authenticates and authorizes whether the remote device accesses the network through the second relay device.
  • the second core network device determines, according to the indication information, that the remote device needs to access the network through the second relay device, and determines the IMSI of the second relay device according to the GUTI of the second relay device, according to the IMSI of the remote device. And the IMSI of the second relay device, whether the remote device can access the network through the second relay device for authentication and authorization, and if the authentication and authorization are passed, the subsequent steps are performed.
  • step 512 directly.
  • Step 506 The second core network device queries, according to the IMSI of the second relay device, that the second relay device is in an idle state, and determines, according to the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device, the current serving base station of the second relay device.
  • the current serving base station of the second relay device is the second base station.
  • the second core network device only sends a paging message to the second base station, where the paging message carries the paging ID of the second relay device and the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device.
  • the paging ID of the second relay device may be an EPS system temporary mobile subscriber identity (EPS TMSI, S-TMSI) allocated by the core network device, or an IMSI of the second relay device.
  • EPS TMSI EPS system temporary mobile subscriber identity
  • Step 507 The second base station determines, according to the ECGI in the Paging message, that the second relay device is currently in the cell, and then pages the second relay device in the cell range.
  • Step 508 After receiving the paging message, the second relay device returns a service request to the second core network device.
  • Step 509 The second core network device sends an initial context setup request (Initial Context Setup Request) to the second base station.
  • the Initial Context Setup Request includes the context of the second relay device, such as an EPS bearer ID, a QoS, and an S-GW address.
  • Step 510 The second base station establishes a context of the second relay device, and establishes an RB with the second relay device.
  • Step 511 The second base station sends an initial context setup complete (Initial Context Setup Complete) to the second core network device.
  • an initial context setup complete Initial Context Setup Complete
  • Step 512 The second core network device returns a handover request message (Handover Request) to the second base station.
  • the Handover Request includes an identifier assigned by the second core network device to the remote device, an identifier assigned by the second base station to the second relay device, and a Source to Target Container, where the container includes the remote device context.
  • the Handover Request may further include indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the second relay device switches to the handover between the relay devices instead of switching from the indirect path to the direct path (that is, the remote device switches from the indirect path connection network) Connect to the network directly.)
  • the identifier assigned by the second base station to the second relay device is also used to indicate that the second relay device switches to the handover between the relay devices instead of switching from the indirect path to the direct path (ie, the remote device connects from the indirect path).
  • the network switches to the direct path connection network).
  • Step 513 The second base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the remote device context in the Source to Target Container, where the first mapping relationship is between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the first relay device.
  • the mapping relationship between the SLBI and the second mapping relationship is the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay device.
  • the second base station allocates a new L2 ID to the remote device, and establishes a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device and the DRB ID of the second relay device.
  • Step 514 The second base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second relay device, and the second relay device returns an RRC Connection Complete message.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to notify the second relay device that it is a relay device of the remote device.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message may further include an L2 ID of the remote device, a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI of the second relay device, an EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device, and the second middle Following the mapping relationship of the DRB ID of the device.
  • Step 515 The second base station sends a handover request response (HO request ack) to the second core network device, to notify the second core network device that the handover preparation is completed, and the remote device can access the network through the second relay device.
  • HO request ack handover request response
  • the HO request ack includes a Target to source container, and the container includes an L2 ID assigned by the second base station to the remote device, and a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay device.
  • Step 516 The second core network device sends a Forward Relocation Response to the first core network device, and carries a Target to source container in the Forward Relocation Response.
  • Step 517 The first core network device sends a handover command (HO Command) to the first base station, and notifies the first base station that the handover preparation for the remote device has been completed.
  • HO Command handover command
  • the switch command includes a Target to source container.
  • Step 518a The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first relay device, to notify the first relay device to delete the related configuration that is relayed to the remote device.
  • Step 518b The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the remote device, to notify the remote device to switch to the second relay device.
  • step 518a and step 518b are not limited herein, or step 518a and step 518b may be performed in parallel.
  • the first base station may carry at least one of the following information in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device: the indication information, the related configuration of the side link bearer identifier between the remote device and the second relay device, and the remote device
  • the indication information is used to notify the remote device that the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to implement handover between the relay devices. If the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device does not change, the first base station does not carry the mapping relationship in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device. .
  • Step 519 The remote device sends an indirect connection release (Direct Link Release) message to the first relay device, where the first relay device disconnects the PC5 connection with the first relay device, and the first relay device returns an indirect connection release to the remote device. Response response.
  • indirect connection release Direct Link Release
  • Step 520 The remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, and the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
  • Step 521 The remote device establishes a PC5 connection with the second relay device.
  • Step 522 The remote device sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second base station, to notify the second base station that the handover is complete.
  • the first relay device is different from the serving base station and the serving core network device of the second relay device. Therefore, the context of the remote device needs to pass through the first core network device from the first base station.
  • the second core network device is passed to the second base station.
  • the above method can save the signaling consumption of the remote device switching between the relay devices.
  • the remote device switches to another indirect path through an indirect path, and the remote device does not disconnect during the handover process, and maintains the connection to the base station through the indirect path, thereby ensuring service continuity of the remote device.
  • the paging of the second relay device to the specific cell under the designated base station by the core network device saves the paging of the network resource of the second relay device.
  • the remote device may also initiate a handover request by using the second relay device, as described in the following steps.
  • Step 601 The remote device connects to the network by using the first relay device.
  • Step 602 The remote device sends a first request message to the second relay device, where the second relay device receives the first request message sent by the remote device.
  • the first request message includes: an identifier of the remote device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the first request message is used to request the second relay device to initiate a request to the network to remotely The device switches from connecting to the network through the first relay device to the network through the second relay device.
  • the second relay device After receiving the first request message, the second relay device sends a request to the network according to the first request message, where the request is used to switch the remote device from the first relay device to the network through the second relay device. Connect Network.
  • the core network device serving the first relay device is the first core network device, and the service is second. If the core network device of the relay device is the second core network device, step 603a to step 611a are performed; if the core network device serving the first relay device and the second relay device is the first core network device, executing Step 603b to step 607b.
  • Step 603a The second relay device sends a second request message to the second core network device, where the second core network device receives the second request message sent by the second relay device.
  • the second request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the first request message and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices.
  • Step 604a The second core network device sends a third request message to the first core network device, where the second core network device receives the third request message sent by the first core network device.
  • the third request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the second request message, and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device is to be The network is switched by the first relay device to connect to the network through the second relay device.
  • Step 605a The first core network device sends a context request message to the first base station, where the first base station receives the context request message sent by the first core network device.
  • the context request message includes an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station to the remote device.
  • Step 606a The first base station returns a context response message to the first core network device.
  • the context response message includes an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first core network device for the remote device, and context information of the remote device at the first base station.
  • Step 607a The first core network device sends a response message of the third request message to the second core network device, where the second core network device receives the response message sent by the first core network device.
  • the response message of the third request message includes the identifier of the remote device, the context information of the remote device on the first core network device, and the context information of the remote device at the first base station.
  • Step 608a The second core network device sends a response message of the second request message to the second base station, and the second base station receives the response message of the second request message sent by the second core network device.
  • the response message of the second request message includes the context information of the remote device at the first base station, the identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the second core network device for the remote device, and the second base station allocated for the second relay device.
  • the identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the second base station to the second relay device is used to notify the second relay device: the remote end The device will switch to the network connected by the second relay device.
  • Step 609a The second base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship.
  • the first mapping relationship is: a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is the side between the bearer label of the remote device and the second relay device.
  • the mapping relationship between the link bearer identifiers is: a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is the side between the bearer label of the remote device and the second relay device.
  • Step 610a The first base station sends a response message to the remote device, for example, the response message is a reconfiguration message, and the remote device receives the response message sent by the first base station.
  • the reconfiguration message includes indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices.
  • the remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the reconfiguration message, where the first mapping relationship is: a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the first relay device, and second The mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
  • Step 611a The remote device establishes a connection with the second relay device based on the received response message.
  • switching is made by connecting the network through the first relay device to connecting to the network through the second relay device.
  • Step 603b The second relay device sends a second request message to the first core network device, where the first core network device receives the second request message sent by the second relay device.
  • the second request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the first request message and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device is to be Switching to the network through the first relay device to the network through the second relay device
  • Step 604b The first core network device sends a fourth request message to the serving base station of the second relay device, and the serving base station of the second relay device receives the fourth request message sent by the first core network device.
  • the fourth request message is used to indicate the serving base station of the second relay device: the first mapping relationship is obtained, and the first mapping relationship is multiplexed to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: the bearer identifier of the remote device and the first middle
  • the second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
  • the fourth request message includes the identifier allocated by the first base station for the remote device, and the first base station is allocated for the second relay device.
  • the fourth request message includes the identifier allocated by the first base station to the remote device, and the first base station is the first base station.
  • the identifier assigned by the second relay device and the identifier of the first base station are the second base station.
  • the second base station sends a context request message to the first base station according to the identifier of the first base station in the fourth request message, and the first base station receives the first request message.
  • the context request message sent by the second base station returns a context response message to the second base station.
  • the context request message may include an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station for the remote device, and an identifier for the X2 interface allocated by the second base station to the remote device, obtained from the fourth request message.
  • the context response message may include an identifier for the X2 interface allocated by the first base station for the remote device, an identifier for the X2 interface allocated by the second base station for the remote device, and context information of the remote device.
  • Step 605b The serving base station of the second relay device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship.
  • Step 606b The first base station sends a response message to the remote device, for example, the response message is a reconfiguration message, and the remote device receives the response message sent by the first base station.
  • the response message includes indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices.
  • the remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the reconfiguration message, where the first mapping relationship is: A mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device.
  • Step 607b The remote device establishes a connection with the second relay device based on the received response message.
  • switching is made by connecting the network through the first relay device to connecting to the network through the second relay device.
  • the first relay device is the same as the serving base station of the second relay device, and is the first base station, and the serving core network device of the first relay device and the second relay device are also the same, and is the first core network. device.
  • the specific signaling interaction process is shown in Figure 7.
  • Step 701 The second relay device broadcasts a discovery message, and the remote device receives the discovery message.
  • the discovery message includes an ECGI of a cell currently camped by the second relay device, and the discovery message further includes a GUTI allocated by the core network device to the second relay device.
  • the remote device acquires the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device and the GUTI of the second relay device included in the discovery message.
  • Step 702 The remote device sends a first request message to the second relay device.
  • the first request message may also be referred to as a first handover request (HO request).
  • the first request message includes indication information.
  • the indication information may also be referred to as a relay switch indication (Relay Switch Indication), for indicating that the request message is used for requesting handover between the relay devices.
  • the first request message further includes an ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device and a GUTI of the second relay device.
  • Step 703 The second relay device sends a second request message to the first core network device, where the first core network device receives the second request message sent by the second relay device.
  • the second request message may be a service request, where the service request includes the indication information obtained from the first request message and the GUTI of the remote device.
  • the indication information is used to indicate that the service request is initiated to provide a relay service to the remote device.
  • Step 704 The first core network device authenticates and authorizes whether the remote device accesses the network through the second relay device.
  • the first core network device determines, according to the indication information, that the remote device needs to access the network through the second relay device, and determines the IMSI of the second relay device according to the GUTI of the second relay device, according to the IMSI of the remote device. And the IMSI of the second relay device, whether the remote device can access the network through the second relay device for authentication and authorization, and if the authentication and authorization are passed, the subsequent steps are performed.
  • steps 705-707 are performed; otherwise, step 708 is performed.
  • Step 705 The first core network device sends an initial context setup request (Initial Context Setup Request) to the first base station.
  • an initial context setup request (Initial Context Setup Request)
  • the Initial Context Setup Request includes the context of the second relay device, such as an EPS bearer ID, a QoS, and an S-GW address.
  • Step 706 The first base station establishes a context of the second relay device, and establishes an RB with the second relay device.
  • Step 707 The first base station sends an initial context setup complete (Initial Context Setup Complete) to the first core network device.
  • an initial context setup complete Initial Context Setup Complete
  • Step 708 The first core network device returns a handover request message (Handover Request) to the first base station.
  • the Handover Request includes an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station for the second relay device, and an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station to the remote device.
  • Step 709 The first base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the identifier used by the first base station for the second relay device for the S1 interface, where the first mapping relationship is the EPS bearer ID of the remote device.
  • the mapping relationship between the first relay device and the SLBI, and the second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay devices.
  • the first base station allocates a new L2 ID to the remote device, and establishes a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device and the DRB ID of the second relay device.
  • Step 710 The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second relay device, and the second relay device returns an RRC Connection Complete message.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to notify the second relay device that it is a relay device of the remote device.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message may further include an L2 ID of the remote device, a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI of the second relay device, an EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device, and the second middle Following the mapping relationship of the DRB ID of the device.
  • Step 711a The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first relay device, to notify the first relay device to delete the related configuration that is relayed to the remote device.
  • Step 711b The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the remote device, to notify the remote device to switch to the second relay device.
  • the first base station may carry at least one of the following information in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device: the indication information, the related configuration of the side link bearer identifier between the remote device and the second relay device, and the remote device
  • the indication information is used to notify the remote device that the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to implement handover between the relay devices. If the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device does not change, the first base station does not carry the mapping relationship in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device. .
  • step 711a and step 711b are not limited herein, or step 711a and step 711b may be performed in parallel.
  • Step 712 The remote device sends an indirect connection release (Direct Link Release) message to the first relay device, where the first relay device disconnects the PC5 connection with the first relay device, and the first relay device returns an indirect connection release to the remote device. Response response.
  • indirect connection release Direct Link Release
  • Step 713 The remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, and the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
  • the first mapping relationship is: mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device
  • the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
  • Step 714 The remote device establishes a PC5 connection with the second relay device.
  • Step 715 The remote device sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the first base station, to notify the first base station that the handover is complete.
  • Step 716 The first base station sends a handover complete message to the first core network device, to notify the first core network device that the handover is complete.
  • the above method can save the signaling consumption of the remote device switching between the relay devices, and the remote device switches to another indirect path through an indirect path, and the remote end is in the process of switching.
  • the device is not disconnected, and the base station is connected through an indirect path to ensure the continuity of the remote device service.
  • Application scenario 5 the serving base station of the first relay device is the first base station, and the serving base station of the second relay device is the second The base station, the first relay device, and the service core network device of the second relay device are all the first core network devices.
  • the specific signaling interaction process is shown in Figure 8.
  • Steps 801 to 804 are the same as steps 701 to 704, and the details are not described again.
  • step 808 if the second relay device is in an idle state, perform steps 805-807; otherwise, perform step 808.
  • Step 805 The first core network device sends an initial context setup request (Initial Context Setup Request) to the second base station.
  • an initial context setup request Initial Context Setup Request
  • the Initial Context Setup Request includes the context of the second relay device, such as an EPS bearer ID, a QoS, and an S-GW address.
  • Step 806 The second base station establishes a context of the second relay device, and establishes an RB with the second relay device.
  • Step 807 The second base station sends an initial context setup complete (Initial Context Setup Complete) to the first core network device.
  • an initial context setup complete Initial Context Setup Complete
  • Step 808 The first core network device returns a handover request message (Handover Request) to the second base station.
  • the Handover Request includes an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station for the second relay device, an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station for the remote device, and an identifier of the first base station.
  • Step 809 The second base station sends a context request message to the first base station according to the identifier of the first base station.
  • the context request message includes an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station for the remote device, and an identifier for the X2 interface allocated by the second base station to the remote device.
  • the context request message includes an S1-AP ID Indication. It should be noted that the context request message is sent on the X2 interface between the base stations, and the identifier used by the first base station for the remote device to be used for the X2 interface should be used, but the first base station has not allocated the identifier yet. In order for the first base station to identify the remote device, the identity assigned by the first base station to the remote device for the S1 interface is used in the context request message.
  • Step 810 The first base station returns a context response message to the second base station.
  • the context response message includes an identifier for the X2 interface allocated by the first base station for the remote device, an identifier for the X2 interface allocated by the second base station for the remote device, and context information of the remote device.
  • Step 811 The second base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the context information of the remote device, where the first mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the first relay device.
  • the second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay devices.
  • the second base station allocates a new L2 ID to the remote device, and establishes a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device and the DRB ID of the second relay device.
  • Step 812 The second base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second relay device, and the second relay device returns an RRC Connection Complete message.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to notify the second relay device of the configuration for relaying the remote device.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message may further include an L2 ID of the remote device, a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI of the second relay device, an EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device, and the second middle Following the mapping relationship of the DRB ID of the device.
  • Step 813 The second base station sends a context response acknowledgement message (Context Response Ack) to the first base station.
  • Context Response Ack a context response acknowledgement message
  • the context response confirmation message includes a target to source container, where the container includes the L2 ID of the remote device, the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay device.
  • Step 814a The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first relay device, where the first relay device is notified. Delete the related configuration for the remote device relay.
  • Step 814b The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the remote device, to notify the remote device to switch to the second relay device.
  • the first base station may carry at least one of the following information in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device: the indication information, the related configuration of the side link bearer identifier between the remote device and the second relay device, and the remote device
  • the indication information is used to notify the remote device that the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to implement handover between the relay devices. If the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device does not change, the first base station does not carry the mapping relationship in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device. .
  • steps 814a and 814b are not limited herein, or steps 814a and 814b may be performed in parallel.
  • Step 815 The remote device sends an indirect connection release (Direct Link Release) message to the first relay device, where the first relay device disconnects the PC5 connection with the first relay device, and the first relay device returns an indirect connection release to the remote device. Response response.
  • indirect connection release Direct Link Release
  • Step 816 The remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, and the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
  • the first mapping relationship is: mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device
  • the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
  • Step 817 The remote device establishes a PC5 connection with the second relay device.
  • Step 818 The remote device sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the first base station, to notify the first base station that the handover is complete.
  • Step 819 The first base station sends a handover complete message to the first core network device, to notify the first core network device that the handover is complete.
  • the first relay device is different from the serving base station of the second relay device, and therefore the second base station requests the first base station for the context information of the remote device.
  • the above method can save the signaling consumption of the remote device switching between the relay devices, and the remote device switches to another indirect path through an indirect path, and the remote device does not disconnect during the switching process, and maintains the indirect path.
  • the base station is connected to ensure the continuity of the service of the remote device.
  • Application scenario 6 the serving base station of the first relay device is the first base station, the serving base station of the second relay device is the second base station, and the serving core network devices of the first relay device are all the first core network devices, and the second The service core network devices of the relay device are all second core network devices.
  • the specific signaling interaction process is shown in Figure 9.
  • Steps 901 to 902 are the same as steps 701 to 702, and the details are not described again.
  • Step 903 The second relay device sends a second request message to the second core network device, where the second core network device receives the second request message sent by the second relay device.
  • the second request message may be a service request, where the service request includes the indication information obtained from the first request message and the GUTI of the remote device.
  • the indication information is used to indicate that the service request is initiated to provide a relay service to the remote device.
  • Step 904 The second core network device authenticates and authorizes whether the remote device accesses the network through the second relay device.
  • the second core network device determines, according to the indication information, that the remote device needs to access the network through the second relay device, and determines the IMSI of the second relay device according to the GUTI of the second relay device, according to the IMSI of the remote device. And second The IMSI of the relay device authenticates and authorizes whether the remote device accesses the network through the second relay device. If the authentication and authorization are passed, the subsequent steps are performed.
  • step 905-907 if the second relay device is in an idle state, perform steps 905-907; otherwise, perform step 908.
  • Step 905 The second core network device sends an Initial Context Setup Request to the second base station.
  • the Initial Context Setup Request includes the context of the second relay device, such as an EPS bearer ID (EPS bearer ID), a QoS, and an S-GW address (S-GW address).
  • EPS bearer ID EPS bearer ID
  • QoS QoS
  • S-GW address S-GW address
  • Step 906 The second base station establishes a context of the second relay device, and establishes an RB with the second relay device.
  • Step 907 The second base station sends an initial context setup complete (Initial Context Setup Complete) to the second core network device.
  • an initial context setup complete Initial Context Setup Complete
  • Step 908 The second core network device sends a Relocation Required to the first core network device.
  • Relocation Required contains the GUTI or IMSI of the remote device.
  • Step 909 The first core network device sends a handover request (Handover Request) to the first base station.
  • the Handover Request includes an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station for the remote device, and an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first core network device to the remote device.
  • the S1 signaling between the first core network device and the first base station carries the first base station to allocate the remote device.
  • the identifier for the S1 interface, and the identifier for the S1 interface assigned by the first core network device to the remote device carries the first base station to allocate the remote device.
  • Step 910 The first base station returns a handover response (HO Response) to the first core network device.
  • HO Response handover response
  • the HO Response includes at least one of the following information: a source to target container, an identifier allocated by the first base station for the remote device for the S1 interface, and a first core network device allocated for the remote device. ID of the S1 interface.
  • Step 911 The first core network device sends a Relocaiton Response to the second core network device.
  • the Relocaiton Response includes context information of the remote device on the first core network device, Source to target container, and IMSI of the remote device.
  • Step 912 The second core network device sends a handover request (Handover Request) to the second base station.
  • the Handover Request includes an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the second base station to the remote device, and the identifier of the S1 interface allocated by the second core network device to the remote device, Source to target container, and the second base station is the second medium.
  • Step 913 The second base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship.
  • the first mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the first relay device
  • the second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay device.
  • the second base station allocates a new L2 ID to the remote device, and establishes a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device and the DRB ID of the second relay device.
  • Step 914 The second base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second relay device, and the second relay device returns an RRC Connection Complete message.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to notify the second relay device of the configuration for relaying the remote device.
  • the RRC connection reconfiguration message may further include an L2 ID of the remote device, a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI of the second relay device, an EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device, and the second middle Following the mapping relationship of the DRB ID of the device.
  • Step 915 The second base station sends a handover response (HO response) to the second core network device.
  • the HO response includes a target to source container, where the container includes the L2 ID of the remote device, the EPS bearer ID of the remote device, and the SLBI mapping relationship between the second relay device.
  • Step 916 The second core network device sends a Relocation Response Ack message to the first core network device, where the target to source container and the IMSI of the remote device are included.
  • Step 917 The first core network device sends a HO Response Ack message to the first base station, where the target to source container is included.
  • Step 918a The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first relay device, to notify the first relay device to delete the related configuration that is relayed to the remote device.
  • Step 918b The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the remote device, to notify the remote device to switch to the second relay device.
  • the first base station may carry at least one of the following information in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device: the indication information, the related configuration of the side link bearer identifier between the remote device and the second relay device, and the remote device
  • the indication information is used to notify the remote device that the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to implement handover between the relay devices. If the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device does not change, the first base station does not carry the mapping relationship in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device. .
  • step 918a and step 918b are not limited herein, or steps 918a and 918b may be performed in parallel.
  • Step 919 The remote device sends an indirect connection release (Direct Link Release) message to the first relay device, where the first relay device disconnects the PC5 connection with the first relay device, and the first relay device returns an indirect connection release to the remote device. Response response.
  • indirect connection release Direct Link Release
  • Step 920 The remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, and the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
  • Step 921 The remote device establishes a PC5 connection with the second relay device.
  • Step 922 The remote device sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second base station, to notify the second base station that the handover is complete.
  • Step 923 The first base station sends a handover complete message to the second core network device, to notify the second core network device that the handover is complete.
  • the first relay device is different from the serving base station and the serving core network device of the second relay device, and therefore the context of the remote device needs to pass through the first core network device from the second core network device.
  • the first base station, the first core network device, and the second core network device are delivered to the second base station.
  • the above method can save the signaling consumption of the remote device switching between the relay devices, and the remote device switches to another indirect path through an indirect path, and the remote device does not disconnect during the switching process, and maintains the indirect path.
  • the base station is connected to ensure the continuity of the service of the remote device.
  • the signaling consumption of the remote device switching between the relay devices can be saved, and The remote device switches to another indirect path through an indirect path.
  • the remote device does not disconnect, and the indirect path is connected to the base station to ensure the continuity of the remote device service.
  • the remote device wants to connect to the relay device, In the idle state, when the relay device receives the connection establishment request sent by the remote device, the relay device sends a service request to the core network device to enter the connection state; or, when the downlink data of the relay device arrives, the core network device passes Paging the relay device into the connected state.
  • the core network device allocates a Tracking Area List (TAL) to the relay device.
  • the tracking area list includes several base stations, and the core network device needs to be included in the TAL.
  • the paging relay device under all the base stations consumes a large amount of network resources, resulting in waste of resources.
  • the embodiment of the present application saves the network resource of paging the second relay device by paging the second relay device to the specific cell under the designated base station by using the core network device.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a switching device 1000, which is applied to the remote end.
  • the device is configured to perform the steps performed by the remote device in the method for switching the remote device between the relay devices shown in FIG. 2,
  • the switching device 1000 includes a communication unit 1001 and a processing unit 1002, where:
  • the communication unit 1001 is configured to connect to the network by using the first relay device.
  • the processing unit 1002 is configured to acquire a first identifier of the second relay device.
  • the communication unit 1001 is further configured to send a request message to the base station by using the first relay device;
  • the request message includes a first identifier and indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the remote device switches between the relay devices, and the request message is used to request the base station to switch the remote device from being connected to the network through the first relay device.
  • the second relay device is connected to the network;
  • the communication unit 1001 is further configured to receive a response message for the request message returned by the base station;
  • the processing unit 1002 is further configured to establish a connection with the second relay device based on the response message.
  • the request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell, where the second identifier is used by the base station to determine whether the serving base station of the second relay device is a base station.
  • the second identifier is further configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the core network device to which the second relay device belongs is paged in the second relay device camping cell.
  • the communication unit 1001 is further configured to receive a response message sent by the base station, where the response message includes indication information;
  • the processing unit 1002 is further configured to: multiplex the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the indication information, where the first mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the device and the side link bearer identifier between the first relay device, where The second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer label of the device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a switching device 1100, which is applied to the first device.
  • the base station is configured to perform the steps performed by the first base station in the method for switching the remote device between the relay devices shown in FIG. 2,
  • the switching device 1100 includes a communication unit 1101 and a processing unit 1102, where:
  • the communication unit 1101 is configured to receive a first request message sent by the remote device by using the first relay device, where the first request message includes a first identifier of the second relay device and is used to identify the switch between the relay devices. Indication information;
  • the processing unit 1102 is configured to switch, according to the first request message, the remote device from the first relay device connection network to the second relay device to connect to the network.
  • the first request message further includes: a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell; the second identifier is used by the processing unit to determine whether the serving base station of the second relay device is a device.
  • the second identifier is further configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the core network device to which the second relay device belongs is paged in the second relay device camping cell.
  • processing unit 1102 is specifically configured to:
  • the second request message includes: a first identifier of the second relay device received from the first request message, and an indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices
  • the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device will be switched by connecting the network through the first relay device to the network connected by the second relay device;
  • the first core network device sends a third request message to the second core network device, where the third request message includes: receiving the second request message from the second request message. a first identifier of the relay device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the indication information indicates a second core network device: the remote device is to be switched by the first relay device to the second relay device Connect Network.
  • the first request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell
  • processing unit 1102 determines that the serving base station of the second relay device is the first base station according to the second identifier of the second relay device camping cell, the processing unit 1102 is specifically configured to:
  • mapping relationship is: a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is the remote device a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device;
  • the second request message further includes a first mapping relationship, where The base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a switching device 1200, which is applied to the remote end.
  • the device is configured to perform the steps performed by the remote device in the method for switching the remote device between the relay devices shown in FIG. 6.
  • the switching device 1200 includes a communication unit 1201 and a processing unit 1202, where:
  • the communication unit 1201 is configured to connect to the network by using the first relay device, and send a request message to the second relay device.
  • the request message includes: an identifier of the remote device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the request message is used to request the second relay device to initiate a request to the network, to pass the remote device by the first The relay device connects to the network to switch to the network connected by the second relay device;
  • the communication unit 1201 is further configured to receive a response message sent by the base station;
  • the processing unit 1202 is configured to establish a connection with the second relay device based on the response message.
  • the response message includes indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices
  • the processing unit 1202 is further configured to: after the communication unit 1201 receives the response message sent by the base station, multiplex the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the response message, where the first mapping relationship is: the bearer identifier of the remote device and the first
  • the mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the side link and the bearer identifier of the second link device is the mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a switching device 1300 , where the switching device 1300 is applied to the second device.
  • a relay device configured to perform the steps performed by the second relay device in the method for switching the remote device between the relay devices shown in FIG. 6, the switching device 1300 includes a communication unit 1301 and a processing unit 1302, where:
  • the remote device is connected to the network by using the first relay device, and the communication unit 1301 is configured to receive the first request message sent by the remote device, where the first request message includes: an identifier of the remote device and is used to identify the device between the relay devices. Instructions for switching;
  • the processing unit 1302 is configured to initiate a request to the network according to the first request message, to pass the remote device by using the first
  • the relay device connects to the network to switch to the network connected by the second relay device.
  • processing unit 1302 is specifically configured to:
  • the communication unit 1301 is further configured to send the second core network device to the second core network device.
  • the second request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the first request message and indication information for identifying handover between the relay devices; and the second request message is used by the second core network device Sending a third request message to the first core network device, where the third request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the second request message, and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the indication information is used Instructing the first core network device: the remote device will be switched to be connected to the network by the second relay device by connecting the network through the first relay device; or
  • the communication unit 1301 is further configured to send a second request message to the first core network device, where the second request message is used.
  • the method includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the first request message, and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device is to be passed by the first relay The device connection network switches to the network connected by the second relay device.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a switching device 1400, where the switching device 1400 is applied to the second device.
  • the core network device is configured to perform the steps performed by the second core network device in the method for switching the remote device between the relay devices shown in FIG. 6.
  • the switching device 1400 includes a receiving unit 1401 and a sending unit 1402, where:
  • the remote device connects to the network through the first relay device. If the core network device serving the first relay device is the first core network device and the core network device serving the second relay device is the second core network device, then:
  • the receiving unit 1401 is configured to receive a second request message that is sent by the second relay device after receiving the first request message, where the second request message includes an identifier of the remote device and an indication for identifying switching between the relay devices. information;
  • the sending unit 1402 is configured to send a third request message to the first core network device, where the third request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the second request message and used to identify the switch between the relay devices. Instructing information, the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device will be switched to be connected to the network by the second relay device by connecting the network through the first relay device;
  • the first network device that serves the first relay device and the second relay device serves the first core network device
  • the receiving unit 1401 is configured to receive a second request message that is sent by the second relay device after receiving the first request message, where the second request message includes an identifier of the remote device and an indication for identifying switching between the relay devices. information;
  • the sending unit 1402 is configured to send a fourth request message to the serving base station of the second relay device, where the fourth request message is used to indicate the serving base station of the second relay device: acquiring the first mapping relationship, and multiplexing the first mapping relationship to The second mapping relationship is: a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is the bearer label of the remote device and the second The mapping relationship between the side links carrying the identifiers between the devices.
  • the receiving unit 1401 is further configured to: after sending the third request message to the first core network device, receive the response message returned by the first core network device;
  • the sending unit 1402 is further configured to send a fifth request message to the serving base station of the second relay device, where the fifth request message includes an identifier of the second relay device, and the identifier of the second relay device is used to indicate the serving base station: The end device will switch to the network connected by the second relay device.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a remote device 1500, the remote device 1500 includes transceiver 1501 And a processor 1502, the processor 1502 is configured to execute a set of programs, when the program is executed, the remote device 1500 can perform the remote device execution in the method of switching between the remote devices shown in FIG. A step of. The specific steps are not described here.
  • the remote device 1500 further includes a memory 1503 for storing a program executed by the processor 1502.
  • the processor 1502 may be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), or a combination of a CPU and an NP.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • NP network processor
  • the processor 1502 may further include a hardware chip.
  • the hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a combination thereof.
  • the PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a general array logic (GAL), or any combination thereof.
  • the memory 1503 may include a volatile memory such as a random-access memory (RAM); the memory 1503 may also include a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory (flash) Memory), hard disk drive (HDD) or solid-state drive (SSD); the memory 1503 may also include a combination of the above types of memory.
  • RAM random-access memory
  • non-volatile memory such as a flash memory (flash) Memory), hard disk drive (HDD) or solid-state drive (SSD)
  • the memory 1503 may also include a combination of the above types of memory.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a base station 1600, where the base station 1600 includes a transceiver 1601 and a processor. 1602.
  • the processor 1602 is configured to execute a set of programs. When the program is executed, the base station 1600 can perform the steps performed by the first base station in the method for the remote device to switch between the relay devices shown in FIG. 2. The specific steps are not described here.
  • the base station 1600 further includes a memory 1603 for storing a program executed by the processor 1602.
  • the processor 1602 can be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), or a combination of a CPU and an NP.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • NP network processor
  • the processor 1602 can also further include a hardware chip.
  • the hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a combination thereof.
  • the PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a general array logic (GAL), or any combination thereof.
  • the memory 1603 may include a volatile memory such as a random-access memory (RAM); the memory 1603 may also include a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory (flash) Memory), hard disk drive (HDD) or solid-state drive (SSD); the memory 1603 may also include a combination of the above types of memory.
  • RAM random-access memory
  • non-volatile memory such as a flash memory (flash) Memory), hard disk drive (HDD) or solid-state drive (SSD); the memory 1603 may also include a combination of the above types of memory.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a remote device 1700, where the remote device 1700 includes a transceiver. 1701 and a processor 1702, the processor 1702 is configured to execute a set of programs, when the program is executed, to enable the remote device 1700 to perform the remote device in the method of switching between the relay devices shown in FIG. The steps of the device. The specific steps are not described here.
  • the remote device 1700 further includes a memory 1703 for storing a program executed by the processor 1702.
  • the processor 1702 may be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), or a combination of a CPU and an NP.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • NP network processor
  • the processor 1702 may further include a hardware chip.
  • the above hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), programmable logic device (programmable) Logic device, PLD) or a combination thereof.
  • the PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a general array logic (GAL), or any combination thereof.
  • the memory 1703 may include a volatile memory such as a random-access memory (RAM); the memory 1703 may also include a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory (flash) Memory), hard disk drive (HDD) or solid state drive (SSD); the memory 1703 may also include a combination of the above types of memory.
  • RAM random-access memory
  • non-volatile memory such as a flash memory (flash) Memory), hard disk drive (HDD) or solid state drive (SSD); the memory 1703 may also include a combination of the above types of memory.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a relay device 1800, where the relay device 1800 includes a transceiver. 1801 and a processor 1802.
  • the processor 1802 is configured to execute a set of programs. When the program is executed, the relay device 1800 can perform the second method in which the remote device switches between the relay devices shown in FIG. Following the steps performed by the device. The specific steps are not described here.
  • the relay device 1800 further includes a memory 1803 for storing a program executed by the processor 1802.
  • the processor 1802 can be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), or a combination of a CPU and an NP.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • NP network processor
  • the processor 1802 may further include a hardware chip.
  • the hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a combination thereof.
  • the PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a general array logic (GAL), or any combination thereof.
  • the memory 1803 may include a volatile memory such as a random-access memory (RAM); the memory 1803 may also include a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory (flash) Memory), hard disk drive (HDD) or solid-state drive (SSD); the memory 1803 may also include a combination of the above types of memories.
  • RAM random-access memory
  • non-volatile memory such as a flash memory (flash) Memory), hard disk drive (HDD) or solid-state drive (SSD); the memory 1803 may also include a combination of the above types of memories.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a core network device 1900, where the core network device 1900 includes a transceiver. 1901 and processor 1902, the processor 1902 is configured to execute a set of programs, when the program is executed, the core network device 1900 can perform the second core in the method for switching the remote device between the relay devices shown in FIG. The steps performed by the network device. The specific steps are not described here.
  • the core network device 1900 further includes a memory 1903 for storing a program executed by the processor 1902.
  • the processor 1902 may be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), or a combination of a CPU and an NP.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • NP network processor
  • the processor 1902 may further include a hardware chip.
  • the hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a combination thereof.
  • the PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a general array logic (GAL), or any combination thereof.
  • the memory 1903 may include a volatile memory such as a random-access memory (RAM); the memory 1903 may also include a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory (flash) Memory), hard disk drive (HDD) or solid state drive (solid-state drive, SSD); the memory 1903 may also include a combination of the above types of memories.
  • RAM random-access memory
  • non-volatile memory such as a flash memory (flash) Memory), hard disk drive (HDD) or solid state drive (solid-state drive, SSD); the memory 1903 may also include a combination of the above types of memories.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium for storing a computer program, the computer program comprising a method for performing the method shown in FIG. 2 or FIG.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product comprising instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method illustrated in FIG. 2 or FIG.
  • embodiments of the present application can be provided as a method, system, or computer program product.
  • the present application can take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment in combination of software and hardware.
  • the application can take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) including computer usable program code.
  • the computer program instructions can also be stored in a computer readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing device to operate in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer readable memory produce an article of manufacture comprising the instruction device.
  • the apparatus implements the functions specified in one or more blocks of a flow or a flow and/or block diagram of the flowchart.
  • These computer program instructions can also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device such that a series of operational steps are performed on a computer or other programmable device to produce computer-implemented processing for execution on a computer or other programmable device.
  • the instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in one or more of the flow or in a block or blocks of a flow diagram.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are a switching method and a switching apparatus for a remote device between relay devices, wherein same are for saving on the signaling overhead of the remote device when switching between relay devices. The method comprises: a remote device connecting with a network by means of a first relay device, and the remote device acquiring a first identifier of a second relay device; the remote device sending a request message to a base station by means of the first relay device, wherein the request message comprises the first identifier and indication information, and the indication information is used for characterizing the remote device as switching between the relay devices; and the request message is used for requesting for the base station to switch the remote device from connecting to the network by means of the first relay device to connecting to the network by means of the second relay device, and the remote device receiving a response message, with regard to the request message, returned by the base station; and the remote device establishing a connection with the second relay device based on the response message.

Description

一种远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法及切换装置Method and switching device for switching remote device between relay devices
本申请要求在2017年4月14日提交中国专利局、申请号为201710245606.5、发明名称为“一种在两个中继设备间路径切换的方法”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese Patent Application filed on April 14, 2017, the Chinese Patent Office, Application No. 2017 1024 5606.5, entitled "A Method for Path Switching Between Two Relay Devices", the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference. The citations are incorporated herein by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,特别涉及一种远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法及切换装置。The present application relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a method and a switching device for a remote device to switch between relay devices.
背景技术Background technique
目前,一些类型的可穿戴设备能够直接连接到网络,例如,一种可安装(Subscriber Identity Module,SIM)卡的智能手表可以直接连接到网络,实现拨打电话。由于可穿戴设备体积的限制,可穿戴设备的电池和天线是影响可穿戴设备通信的主要问题。可穿戴设备的电池小,导致待机时间短;可穿戴设备的天线设计困难,目前仅能实现单天线,因此发送数据需要耗费更多的时间和网络资源。Currently, some types of wearable devices can be directly connected to the network. For example, a smart watch with a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card can be directly connected to the network to make a call. Due to the limitation of the size of the wearable device, the battery and antenna of the wearable device are the main problems affecting the communication of the wearable device. The battery of the wearable device is small, resulting in short standby time; the antenna design of the wearable device is difficult, and only a single antenna can be realized at present, so it takes more time and network resources to transmit data.
针对上述问题的一种解决方法是,可穿戴设备通过周围存在的中继设备连接到网络,从而可以节省可穿戴设备的电量并提高传输效率。例如,中继设备可以是手机。当可穿戴设备通过中继设备接入网络时,可穿戴设备作为远端设备,中继设备为可穿戴设备传递上下行数据和信令。这样,可穿戴设备可通过直连路径直接连接到基站;也可以通过间接路径连接到基站,即通过中继设备连接到基站,One solution to the above problem is that the wearable device is connected to the network through the surrounding relay device, so that the power of the wearable device can be saved and the transmission efficiency can be improved. For example, the relay device can be a mobile phone. When the wearable device accesses the network through the relay device, the wearable device functions as a remote device, and the relay device transmits uplink and downlink data and signaling to the wearable device. In this way, the wearable device can be directly connected to the base station through a direct connection path; or can be connected to the base station through an indirect path, that is, connected to the base station through the relay device.
但是,当发生可穿戴设备移动、中继设备移动、中继设备不足以继续提供中继服务等情况时,可穿戴设备为了继续节省自己的电量,需要从原中继设备切换到新的中继设备,也就是在两个中继设备间进行路径切换。假设可穿戴设备当前正通过中继设备1接入网络,需要切换为通过中继设备2接入网络。中继设备1和中继设备2可能属于同一基站管理,也可能属于不同基站管理,图1为中继设备1和中继设备2属于同一基站管理的切换示意图,图2为中继设备1和中继设备2属于不同基站管理的切换示意图。However, when the wearable device moves, the relay device moves, the relay device is insufficient to continue to provide the relay service, etc., the wearable device needs to switch from the original relay device to the new relay in order to continue to save its own power. The device, that is, the path switch between the two relay devices. Assuming that the wearable device is currently accessing the network through the relay device 1, it needs to be switched to access the network through the relay device 2. The relay device 1 and the relay device 2 may belong to the same base station management, and may also belong to different base station management. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of switching between the relay device 1 and the relay device 2 belonging to the same base station management, and FIG. 2 is a relay device 1 and The relay device 2 belongs to a handover diagram managed by different base stations.
现有技术中,可穿戴设备在中继设备间切换的一种方式如下所述。当可穿戴设备通过中继设备接入网络后,可穿戴设备会定期检测PC5链路的信号质量,当可穿戴设备发现PC5的信号质量低于设定的门限值后,可穿戴设备向中继设备发起直连基站的请求,基站收到中继设备转发的该请求后发送无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)连接重配消息给可穿戴设备,告知可穿戴设备直连基站所需要的无线承载(Radio Bearer,RB)的配置,使可穿戴设备可以直连基站。可穿戴设备在收到该RRC连接重配消息后,断开和中继设备的PC5链路,与基站建立Uu链路。为了节省电量等原因,当可穿戴设备发现附近存在新的中继设备时,向基站发起通过新的中继设备接入网络的请求。基站使可穿戴设备从直连路径切换到通过新的中继设备接入网络的间接路径。In the prior art, one way for a wearable device to switch between relay devices is as follows. After the wearable device accesses the network through the relay device, the wearable device periodically detects the signal quality of the PC5 link. When the wearable device finds that the signal quality of the PC5 is lower than the set threshold, the wearable device is centered. After the device initiates the request of the directly connected base station, the base station sends a Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection reconfiguration message to the wearable device after receiving the request forwarded by the relay device, and informs the wearable device that the base station needs to directly connect to the base station. The configuration of the Radio Bearer (RB) enables the wearable device to connect directly to the base station. After receiving the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the wearable device disconnects the PC5 link of the relay device and establishes a Uu link with the base station. In order to save power and the like, when the wearable device finds that there is a new relay device nearby, the base station initiates a request to access the network through the new relay device. The base station switches the wearable device from the direct connection path to an indirect path to access the network through the new relay device.
可以看出,可穿戴设备在执行中继设备间切换的流程时,需要经过间接路径到直连路径的切换,以及直连路径再到间接路径的切换,过程复杂,且浪费信令和电量。It can be seen that the wearable device needs to perform the process of switching from the indirect path to the direct path and the direct path to the indirect path during the process of performing the handover between the relay devices, which is complicated and wastes signaling and power.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法及切换装置,用以解决远端设备在中继设备间切换的过程复杂且信令开销较大的问题。The present invention provides a method for switching between remote devices and a switching device, which is used to solve the problem that the remote device switches between the relay devices is complicated and the signaling overhead is large.
第一方面,提供一种远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法,具体为:远端设备通过第一中继设备连接网络,在连接网络期间,若发现与第一中继设备之间的信号质量低于设定阈值,则通过以下方法实现中继设备间的切换。假设远端设备预先获取第二中继设备的第一标识,所述远端设备通过所述第一中继设备向基站发送请求消息,在所述请求消息中携带所述第一标识和指示信息,通过所述指示信息表征所述远端设备在中继设备间切换;所述请求消息用于请求所述基站将所述远端设备由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络;所述远端设备接收所述基站返回的针对所述请求消息的响应消息,基于所述响应消息,建立与所述第二中继设备的连接,即可实现由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到由第二中继设备连接网络。这样,避免远端设备在执行中继设备间切换的流程时过程复杂且浪费信令和电量,通过直接在两个中继设备间切换,保证远端设备业务的连续性,且有助于节省信令消耗以及节省电量消耗。The first aspect provides a method for the remote device to switch between the relay devices, where the remote device connects to the network through the first relay device, and if the network device is found to be connected to the first relay device during the network connection If the signal quality is lower than the set threshold, the switching between the relay devices is implemented by the following method. It is assumed that the remote device obtains the first identifier of the second relay device in advance, and the remote device sends a request message to the base station by using the first relay device, and the first identifier and the indication information are carried in the request message. And indicating, by the indication information, that the remote device switches between the relay devices; the request message is used to request the base station to switch the remote device from the first relay device to the network by using the first relay device The second relay device is connected to the network; the remote device receives the response message for the request message returned by the base station, and establishes a connection with the second relay device based on the response message, thereby implementing Switching to the network by the second relay device is switched by connecting the network through the first relay device. In this way, the process of the remote device is prevented from being complicated and wastes signaling and power when performing the process of switching between the relay devices. By directly switching between the two relay devices, the continuity of the service of the remote device is ensured, and the saving is saved. Signaling consumption and saving power consumption.
在一个可能的设计中,所述请求消息中还包括所述第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识,所述第二标识用于所述基站确定所述第二中继设备的服务基站是否为所述基站。In a possible design, the request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell, where the second identifier is used by the base station to determine a serving base station of the second relay device Whether it is the base station.
在一个可能的设计中,所述第二标识还用于:当所述第二中继设备处于空闲态时,所述第二中继设备所属的核心网设备在所述第二中继设备驻留小区内进行寻呼。这样可以节省寻呼第二中继设备的网络资源和无线资源。In a possible design, the second identifier is further configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the core network device to which the second relay device belongs is located at the second relay device Paging in the reserved cell. This can save the paging of the network resources and radio resources of the second relay device.
在一个可能的设计中,所述远端设备通过所述第一中继设备向基站发送请求消息之后,接收所述基站发送的响应消息,所述远端设备发现所述响应消息中包括所述指示信息,则根据所述指示信息,复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,所述第一映射关系为所述远端设备的承载标识与所述第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,所述第二映射关系为所述远端设备的承载标载与所述第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。通过直接复用映射关系,有助于加快实现切换。In a possible design, after receiving the request message from the first relay device to the base station, the remote device receives a response message sent by the base station, and the remote device finds that the response message includes the And indicating, according to the indication information, the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is a side link between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the first relay device. The mapping relationship of the bearer identifier, where the second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device. By directly multiplexing the mapping relationships, it helps to speed up the switch.
第二方面,提供一种远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法,第一基站接收远端设备通过第一中继设备发送的第一请求消息,解析所述第一请求消息,发现第一请求消息中携带的第二中继设备的第一标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,根据所述第一请求消息,将所述远端设备由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。这样,避免远端设备在执行中继设备间切换的流程时过程复杂且浪费信令和电量,通过直接在两个中继设备间切换,保证远端设备业务的连续性,且有助于节省信令消耗以及节省电量消耗。The second aspect provides a method for the remote device to switch between the relay devices. The first base station receives the first request message sent by the remote device by using the first relay device, parses the first request message, and finds the first The first identifier of the second relay device carried in the request message and the indication information for identifying the handover between the relay devices, according to the first request message, the remote device is passed by the first relay The device connection network switches to connect to the network by the second relay device. In this way, the process of the remote device is prevented from being complicated and wastes signaling and power when performing the process of switching between the relay devices. By directly switching between the two relay devices, the continuity of the service of the remote device is ensured, and the saving is saved. Signaling consumption and saving power consumption.
在一个可能的设计中,所述第一请求消息中还包括所述第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识;所述第二标识用于所述第一基站确定所述第二中继设备的服务基站是否为所述第一基站。In a possible design, the first request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell; the second identifier is used by the first base station to determine the second relay Whether the serving base station of the device is the first base station.
在一个可能的设计中,所述第二标识还用于,当所述第二中继设备处于空闲态时,所述第二中继设备所属的核心网设备在所述第二中继设备驻留小区内进行寻呼。这样可以节省寻呼第二中继设备的网络资源和无线资源。In a possible design, the second identifier is further configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the core network device to which the second relay device belongs is located in the second relay device. Paging in the reserved cell. This can save the paging of the network resources and radio resources of the second relay device.
在一个可能的设计中,所述第一基站根据所述第一请求消息,将所述远端设备由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络,通过以下方式实现:所述第一基站向第一核心网设备发送第二请求消息,在所述第二请求消息中携带:从所述第 一请求消息中收到的所述第二中继设备的第一标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;所述指示信息用于指示所述第一核心网设备:所述远端设备将由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络;或者,所述第一基站向所述第一核心网设备发送所述第二请求消息,由所述第一核心网设备向第二核心网设备发送第三请求消息,所述第三请求消息中包括:从所述第二请求消息中收到的所述第二中继设备的第一标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;所述指示信息指示所述第二核心网设备:所述远端设备将由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。In a possible design, the first base station switches the remote device from being connected to the network by the first relay device to the network connected by the second relay device according to the first request message. The method is as follows: the first base station sends a second request message to the first core network device, where the second request message carries: from the a first identifier of the second relay device received in a request message and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the far The end device will be switched by the first relay device connection network to be connected to the network by the second relay device; or the first base station sends the second request message to the first core network device, by The first core network device sends a third request message to the second core network device, where the third request message includes: the first identifier of the second relay device received from the second request message And indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the indication information indicating the second core network device: the remote device is to be switched by the first relay device connection network to the second The relay device is connected to the network.
在一个可能的设计中,所述第一请求消息中还包括所述第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识;若所述第一基站根据所述第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识确定所述第二中继设备的服务基站为所述第一基站,则所述第一基站复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,所述第一映射关系为:所述远端设备的承载标识与所述第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,所述第二映射关系为所述远端设备的承载标识与所述第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系;或者,若所述第一基站根据所述第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识确定所述第二中继设备的服务基站不是所述第一基站,则所述第二请求消息中还包含所述第一映射关系,用于所述第二基站复用所述第一映射关系到所述第二映射关系。通过直接复用映射关系,有助于加快实现切换。In a possible design, the first request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell; if the first base station is according to the second relay device camping cell The second mapping determines that the serving base station of the second relay device is the first base station, and the first base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: the remote end a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is a side chain between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the second relay device a mapping relationship of the path bearer identifiers; or, if the first base station determines that the serving base station of the second relay device is not the first base station according to the second identifier of the second relay device camping cell, The second request message further includes the first mapping relationship, where the second base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship. By directly multiplexing the mapping relationships, it helps to speed up the switch.
第三方面,提供一种远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法,远端设备通过第一中继设备连接网络,在连接网络期间,若发现与第一中继设备之间的信号质量低于设定阈值,则向第二中继设备发送请求消息,在所述请求消息中携带所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,通过所述指示信息表征所述远端设备在中继设备间切换;所述请求消息用于请求所述第二中继设备向所述网络发起请求,以将所述远端设备由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。所述远端设备接收基站发送的响应消息,基于所述响应消息,建立与所述第二中继设备的连接,即可实现由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到由第二中继设备连接网络。这样,避免远端设备在执行中继设备间切换的流程时过程复杂且浪费信令和电量,通过直接在两个中继设备间切换,保证远端设备业务的连续性,且有助于节省信令消耗以及节省电量消耗。。The third aspect provides a method for the remote device to switch between the relay devices. The remote device connects to the network through the first relay device, and the signal quality between the first relay device and the first relay device is low during the connection between the networks. Sending a request message to the second relay device, where the request message carries an identifier of the remote device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, and is characterized by the indication information. The remote device switches between the relay devices; the request message is used to request the second relay device to initiate a request to the network, to connect the remote device by using the first relay device. The network switches to connect to the network by the second relay device. The remote device receives the response message sent by the base station, and establishes a connection with the second relay device based on the response message, so that the network is switched to the second relay device by connecting the network through the first relay device. Connect Network. In this way, the process of the remote device is prevented from being complicated and wastes signaling and power when performing the process of switching between the relay devices. By directly switching between the two relay devices, the continuity of the service of the remote device is ensured, and the saving is saved. Signaling consumption and saving power consumption. .
在一个可能的设计中,所述响应消息中包括用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,所述远端设备接收基站发送的响应消息之后,根据所述响应消息,复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,所述第一映射关系为:所述远端设备的承载标识与所述第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,所述第二映射关系为所述远端设备的承载标载与所述第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,通过直接复用映射关系,有助于加快实现切换。In a possible design, the response message includes indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, and after receiving the response message sent by the base station, the remote device multiplexes the first mapping according to the response message. The second mapping relationship is: the mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is The mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device is used to facilitate the switching by directly multiplexing the mapping relationship.
第四方面,提供一种远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法,所述远端设备通过第一中继设备连接网络,第二中继设备接收所述远端设备发送的第一请求消息,所述第一请求消息中包括:所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,所述第二中继设备根据所述第一请求消息,向所述网络发起请求,以将所述远端设备由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。这样,避免远端设备在执行中继设备间切换的流程时过程复杂且浪费信令和电量,通过直接在两个中继设备间切换,保证远端设备业务的连续性,且有助于节省信令消耗以及节省电量消耗。The fourth aspect provides a method for the remote device to switch between the relay devices, where the remote device connects to the network through the first relay device, and the second relay device receives the first request message sent by the remote device. The first request message includes: an identifier of the remote device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the second relay device sends the network to the network according to the first request message. A request is initiated to switch the remote device from being connected to the network by the first relay device to the network connected by the second relay device. In this way, the process of the remote device is prevented from being complicated and wastes signaling and power when performing the process of switching between the relay devices. By directly switching between the two relay devices, the continuity of the service of the remote device is ensured, and the saving is saved. Signaling consumption and saving power consumption.
在一个可能的设计中,若服务所述第一中继设备的核心网设备为第一核心网设备,服务所述第二中继设备的核心网设备为第二核心网设备,则所述第二中继设备向所述第二核 心网设备发送第二请求消息,所述第二请求消息中包括:从所述第一请求消息中收到的所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;所述第二请求消息用于所述第二核心网设备向第一核心网设备发送第三请求消息,所述第三请求消息中包括:从所述第二请求消息中收到的所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述第一核心网设备:所述远端设备将由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络;或者,若服务所述第一中继设备和服务所述第二中继设备的核心网设备均为第一核心网设备,则所述第二中继设备向所述第一核心网设备发送所述第二请求消息,所述第二请求消息中包括:从所述第一请求消息中收到的所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述第一核心网设备:所述远端设备将由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。In a possible design, if the core network device serving the first relay device is the first core network device, and the core network device serving the second relay device is the second core network device, the Two relay devices to the second core The network device sends a second request message, where the second request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the first request message, and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; The second request message is used by the second core network device to send a third request message to the first core network device, where the third request message includes: the far received from the second request message The identifier of the end device and the indication information for identifying the handover between the relay devices, the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device is to be switched by connecting the network through the first relay device Connecting to the network by the second relay device; or, if the first relay device serving the second relay device and the core network device serving the second relay device are both the first core network device, the second middle The device sends the second request message to the first core network device, where the second request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the first request message, and is used to identify Switching between relay devices Display information, the first indication information for indicating the core network device: the device will be switched to the distal end of said first relay device connected to the network by the second relay apparatus connected to the network.
第五方面,提供一种远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法,所述远端设备通过第一中继设备连接网络,若服务所述第一中继设备的核心网设备为第一核心网设备,服务第二中继设备的核心网设备为第二核心网设备,则所述第二核心网设备接收所述第二中继设备在收到第一请求消息后发送的第二请求消息,所述第二请求消息中包括所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;所述第二核心网设备向所述第一核心网设备发送第三请求消息,所述第三请求消息中包括:从所述第二请求消息中收到的所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述第一核心网设备:所述远端设备将由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络;若服务所述第一中继设备和服务所述第二中继设备的核心网设备均为第一核心网设备,则:所述第一核心网设备接收所述第二中继设备在收到第一请求消息后发送的第二请求消息,所述第二请求消息中包括所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;所述第一核心网设备向所述第二中继设备的服务基站发送第四请求消息,所述第四请求消息用于指示所述第二中继设备的服务基站:获取第一映射关系,复用所述第一映射关系到第二映射关系,所述第一映射关系为:所述远端设备的承载标识与所述第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,所述第二映射关系为所述远端设备的承载标载与所述第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。这样,避免远端设备在执行中继设备间切换的流程时过程复杂且浪费信令和电量,通过直接在两个中继设备间切换,保证远端设备业务的连续性,且有助于节省信令消耗以及节省电量消耗。通过直接复用映射关系,有助于加快实现切换。The fifth aspect provides a method for the remote device to switch between the relay devices, where the remote device connects to the network through the first relay device, and the core network device that serves the first relay device is the first core. a network device, where the core network device serving the second relay device is the second core network device, and the second core network device receives the second request message sent by the second relay device after receiving the first request message. The second request message includes an identifier of the remote device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the second core network device sends a third request message to the first core network device. The third request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the second request message, and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the indication information is used to indicate The first core network device: the remote device will be switched by the first relay device connection network to be connected to the network by the second relay device; if the first relay device and the service are served Two relay settings The core network device is the first core network device, and the first core network device receives the second request message sent by the second relay device after receiving the first request message, and the second request message The identifier of the remote device and the indication information for identifying the handover between the relay devices are included; the first core network device sends a fourth request message to the serving base station of the second relay device, where the The fourth request message is used to indicate the serving base station of the second relay device: the first mapping relationship is obtained, and the first mapping relationship is multiplexed to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: the remote device a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is a side chain between the bearer label of the remote device and the second relay device The mapping relationship between the road bearer identifiers. In this way, the process of the remote device is prevented from being complicated and wastes signaling and power when performing the process of switching between the relay devices. By directly switching between the two relay devices, the continuity of the service of the remote device is ensured, and the saving is saved. Signaling consumption and saving power consumption. By directly multiplexing the mapping relationships, it helps to speed up the switch.
在一个可能的设计中,所述第二核心网设备向所述第一核心网设备发送第三请求消息之后,所述第二核心网设备接收所述第一核心网设备返回的响应消息,所述第二核心网设备向所述第二中继设备的服务基站发送第五请求消息,所述第五请求消息中包括所述第二中继设备的标识,所述第二中继设备的标识用于指示所述服务基站:所述远端设备将切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。In a possible design, after the second core network device sends a third request message to the first core network device, the second core network device receives a response message returned by the first core network device, where The second core network device sends a fifth request message to the serving base station of the second relay device, where the fifth request message includes an identifier of the second relay device, and an identifier of the second relay device For indicating the serving base station: the remote device will switch to connect to the network by the second relay device.
第六方面,提供一种切换装置,应用于远端设备,该装置具有实现上述第一方面和第一方面的任一种可能的设计中远端设备行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a sixth aspect, a switching apparatus is provided for use in a remote device having a function of implementing the behavior of the remote device in any of the possible aspects of the first aspect and the first aspect described above. The functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
在一个可能的设计中,该装置的结构包括收发器和处理器,其中,所述处理器用于调 用一组程序以执行如上述第一方面和第一方面的任一种可能的设计中所述的方法。In one possible design, the structure of the apparatus includes a transceiver and a processor, wherein the processor is used for tuning A set of programs is used to perform the methods described in the first aspect and any of the possible designs of the first aspect.
第七方面,提供一种切换装置,应用于第一基站,该装置具有实现上述第二方面和第二方面的任一种可能的设计中第一基站行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a seventh aspect, a handover apparatus is provided for use in a first base station, the apparatus having the functionality to implement the behavior of the first base station in any of the possible aspects of the second aspect and the second aspect described above. The functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
在一个可能的设计中,该装置的结构包括收发器和处理器,其中,所述处理器用于调用一组程序以执行如上述第二方面和第二方面的任一种可能的设计中所述的方法。In one possible design, the structure of the apparatus includes a transceiver and a processor, wherein the processor is configured to invoke a set of programs to perform as described in any of the possible designs of the second and second aspects above Methods.
第八方面,提供一种切换装置,应用于远端设备,该装置具有实现上述第三方面和第三方面的任一种可能的设计中远端设备行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In an eighth aspect, a switching apparatus is provided for use in a remote device having a function of implementing remote device behavior in any of the possible aspects of the third aspect and the third aspect described above. The functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
在一个可能的设计中,该装置的结构包括收发器和处理器,其中,所述处理器用于调用一组程序以执行如上述第三方面和第三方面的任一种可能的设计中所述的方法。In one possible design, the structure of the apparatus includes a transceiver and a processor, wherein the processor is configured to invoke a set of programs to perform as described in any of the possible designs of the third and third aspects above Methods.
第九方面,提供一种切换装置,应用于第二中继设备,该装置具有实现上述第四方面和第四方面的任一种可能的设计中远端设备行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a ninth aspect, a switching apparatus is provided for use in a second relay device having a function of implementing remote device behavior in any of the possible aspects of the fourth aspect and the fourth aspect described above. The functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
在一个可能的设计中,该装置的结构包括收发器和处理器,其中,所述处理器用于调用一组程序以执行如上述第四方面和第四方面的任一种可能的设计中所述的方法。In one possible design, the structure of the apparatus includes a transceiver and a processor, wherein the processor is configured to invoke a set of programs to perform as described in any of the possible designs of the fourth and fourth aspects above Methods.
第十方面,提供一种切换装置,应用于第二核心网设备,该装置具有实现上述第五方面和第五方面的任一种可能的设计中第二核心网设备行为的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a tenth aspect, a switching apparatus is provided for use in a second core network device, the apparatus having a function of implementing the behavior of the second core network device in any of the possible aspects of the fifth aspect and the fifth aspect. The functions may be implemented by hardware or by corresponding software implemented by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
在一个可能的设计中,该装置的结构包括收发器和处理器,其中,所述处理器用于调用一组程序以执行如上述第五方面和第五方面的任一种可能的设计中所述的方法。In one possible design, the structure of the apparatus includes a transceiver and a processor, wherein the processor is configured to invoke a set of programs to perform as described in any of the possible designs of the fifth and fifth aspects above Methods.
第十一方面,提供了一种计算机存储介质,用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序包括用于执行各方面所述方法的指令。In an eleventh aspect, a computer storage medium is provided for storing a computer program, the computer program comprising instructions for performing the methods of the various aspects.
第十二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述各方面所述的方法。According to a twelfth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product comprising instructions, which when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method described in the above aspects.
附图说明DRAWINGS
图1为本申请实施例中通信系统架构图;1 is a structural diagram of a communication system in an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例中远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法流程示意图之一;2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for switching a remote device between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图3为本申请实施例中远端设备在中继设备间切换的信令交互示意图之一;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a remote device switching between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图4为本申请实施例中远端设备在中继设备间切换的信令交互示意图之二;FIG. 4 is a second schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a remote device switching between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图5为本申请实施例中远端设备在中继设备间切换的信令交互示意图之三;FIG. 5 is a third schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a remote device switching between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图6为本申请实施例中远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法流程示意图之二;FIG. 6 is a second schematic flowchart of a method for switching a remote device between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图7为本申请实施例中远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法流程示意图之四;FIG. 7 is a fourth schematic flowchart of a method for switching a remote device between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图8为本申请实施例中远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法流程示意图之五;FIG. 8 is a fifth schematic flowchart of a method for switching a remote device between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图9为本申请实施例中远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法流程示意图之六; 9 is a schematic flowchart of a method for switching a remote device between relay devices according to an embodiment of the present application;
图10~图14为本申请实施例中切换装置结构示意图;10 to FIG. 14 are schematic structural diagrams of a switching device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图15为本申请实施例中远端设备结构示意图之一;FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a remote device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图16为本申请实施例中基站结构示意图;16 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station in an embodiment of the present application;
图17为本申请实施例中远端设备结构示意图之二;17 is a second schematic structural diagram of a remote device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图18为本申请实施例中中继设备结构示意图;FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of a relay device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图19为本申请实施例中核心网设备结构示意图。FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a core network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合附图,对本申请实施例进行详细描述。The embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
图1为本申请实施例通信系统架构图。通信系统中包括远端设备101、至少一个中继设备102、至少一个基站103和核心网104。核心网104中包括至少一个移动性管理实体(Mobile Management Entity,MME)、服务网关(Serving GW,S-GW)、分组数据网关(PDN GW,P-GW)和近距离服务功能实体(ProSe Function,PF)。远端设备101和中继设备102之间通过PC5链路实现通信。中继设备102是指可以辅助远端设备101接入网络的设备,当远端设备101通过中继设备102接入网络时,中继设备102可以为远端设备101中继上下行数据和信令。中继设备102可以为相对于远端设备101来说性能较高的设备,例如,远端设备101可以是可穿戴设备,中继设备102可以是智能手机、智能平板电脑等智能设备。远端设备101可以通过直接路径(Direct Path)或间接路径(indirect Path)与基站103进行上下行通信。当远端设备101通过间接路径与基站103进行通信时,远端设备101通过中继设备102向基站103发送上下行数据和信令,远端设备101和中继设备102都需要通过数据无线承载(Data Radio Bearer,DRB)与基站103进行上下行数据通信,为了区别远端设备101和中继设备102的数据包,基站103预先为远端设备101分配第2层身份标识(Identity,ID),即layer 2 ID或者L2 ID,在远端设备101的数据包中携带L2 ID,L2 ID用来区别于中继设备102的数据包。基站103为远端设备101的演进分组系统(Evolved Packet System,EPS)承载(bearer)分配对应的侧链路承载标识(side link bearer ID,SLBI)。其中,EPS bearer为可穿戴设备到P-GW的整个承载。FIG. 1 is a structural diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication system includes a remote device 101, at least one relay device 102, at least one base station 103, and a core network 104. The core network 104 includes at least one mobility management entity (MME), a serving gateway (Serving GW, S-GW), a packet data gateway (PDN GW, P-GW), and a proximity service function entity (ProSe Function). , PF). Communication between the remote device 101 and the relay device 102 is through a PC5 link. The relay device 102 refers to a device that can assist the remote device 101 to access the network. When the remote device 101 accesses the network through the relay device 102, the relay device 102 can relay uplink and downlink data and signals for the remote device 101. make. The relay device 102 may be a device with higher performance than the remote device 101. For example, the remote device 101 may be a wearable device, and the relay device 102 may be a smart device such as a smart phone or a smart tablet. The remote device 101 can perform uplink and downlink communication with the base station 103 through a direct path or an indirect path. When the remote device 101 communicates with the base station 103 through the indirect path, the remote device 101 sends uplink and downlink data and signaling to the base station 103 through the relay device 102, and both the remote device 101 and the relay device 102 need to pass the data radio bearer. (Data Radio Bearer, DRB) performs uplink and downlink data communication with the base station 103. In order to distinguish the data packets of the remote device 101 and the relay device 102, the base station 103 allocates a layer 2 identity (ID) to the remote device 101 in advance. That is, the layer 2 ID or the L2 ID carries the L2 ID in the data packet of the remote device 101, and the L2 ID is used to distinguish the data packet from the relay device 102. The base station 103 allocates a corresponding side link bearer ID (SLBI) to an Evolved Packet System (EPS) bearer of the remote device 101. Among them, the EPS bearer is the entire bearer of the wearable device to the P-GW.
基于图1所示的通信系统架构,下面具体介绍一下本申请实施例提供的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法及装置。Based on the communication system architecture shown in FIG. 1 , a method and an apparatus for switching between remote devices provided by the remote device provided by the embodiments of the present application are specifically described below.
假设远端设备当前通过第一中继设备连接网络,远端设备会定期检查与第一中继设备之间的PC5链路的信号质量,若远端设备确定与第一中继设备之间的PC5链路的信号质量低于门限值,则触发从通过第一中继设备连接网络转换到通过第二中继设备连接网络,具体转换方法如图2或图6所述。图2为远端设备通过第一中继设备发起切换请求,图6为远端设备通过第二中继设备发起切换请求。以下叙述中,核心网设备可以是MME,或者其他具有移动性管理功能的实体。Assuming that the remote device is currently connected to the network through the first relay device, the remote device periodically checks the signal quality of the PC5 link with the first relay device, and if the remote device determines the relationship with the first relay device. If the signal quality of the PC5 link is lower than the threshold, the trigger is switched from connecting the network through the first relay device to connecting to the network through the second relay device. The specific conversion method is as shown in FIG. 2 or FIG. 6. 2 is a remote device initiating a handover request by using a first relay device, and FIG. 6 is a remote device initiating a handover request by using a second relay device. In the following description, the core network device may be an MME or other entity having mobility management functions.
步骤201、远端设备通过第一中继设备连接网络。Step 201: The remote device connects to the network through the first relay device.
步骤202、远端设备获取第二中继设备的第一标识;Step 202: The remote device acquires a first identifier of the second relay device.
步骤203、远端设备通过第一中继设备向第一基站发送第一请求消息,第一基站接收远端设备通过第一中继设备发送的第一请求消息。Step 203: The remote device sends a first request message to the first base station by using the first relay device, where the first base station receives the first request message sent by the remote device by using the first relay device.
第一基站为第一中继设备的服务基站,若第一中继设备和第二中继设备的服务核心网设备均是第一核心网设备,则执行步骤204a;若第一中继设备的服务核心网设备是第一核 心网设备,第二中继设备的服务核心网设备是第二核心网设备,则执行步骤204b。The first base station is a serving base station of the first relay device, and if the serving core network devices of the first relay device and the second relay device are both the first core network device, step 204a is performed; Service core network equipment is the first core The heart network device, the service core network device of the second relay device is the second core network device, and step 204b is performed.
其中,第一请求消息中包括第一标识和指示信息,指示信息用于表征远端设备在中继设备间切换;第一请求消息用于请求基站将远端设备由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到通过第二中继设备连接网络。The first request message includes a first identifier and indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the remote device switches between the relay devices, and the first request message is used to request the base station to connect the remote device by using the first relay device. The network switches to connect to the network through the second relay device.
可选的,第一请求消息中还包括第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识,第二标识用于第一基站确定第二中继设备的服务基站是否为第一基站。Optionally, the first request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell, where the second identifier is used by the first base station to determine whether the serving base station of the second relay device is the first base station.
第一基站接收远端设备通过第一中继设备发送的第一请求消息后,若第一基站根据第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识确定第二中继设备的服务基站为第一基站,则第一基站复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为:远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标识与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系;After the first base station receives the first request message sent by the remote device by using the first relay device, if the first base station determines, according to the second identifier of the second relay device, the serving base station of the second relay device is the first The base station, the first base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the first relay device, and the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device;
若第一基站根据第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识确定第二中继设备的服务基站不是第一基站,则在下述步骤204a或步骤204b中发送的第二请求消息中携带上述第一映射关系,用于第二基站复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系。If the first base station determines that the serving base station of the second relay device is not the first base station according to the second identifier of the second relay device camping cell, the second request message sent in the following step 204a or step 204b carries the foregoing A mapping relationship is used by the second base station to multiplex the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship.
上述远端设备的承载标识可以是4G中的EPS承载标识(EPS bearer ID),也可以是5G中的业务质量流(Quality of Service Flow,QoS ID),本申请实施例不做限定。The bearer identifier of the remote device may be an EPS bearer ID in the 4G, or may be a quality of service flow (QoS ID) in the 5G, which is not limited in this embodiment.
第一基站在接收到第一请求消息后,根据第一请求消息,将远端设备由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到由第二中继设备连接网络。具体地通过以下步骤实现。After receiving the first request message, the first base station switches the remote device from the first relay device connection network to the second relay device to connect to the network according to the first request message. Specifically, it is achieved by the following steps.
步骤204a、第一基站向第一核心网设备发送第二请求消息。Step 204: The first base station sends a second request message to the first core network device.
第二请求消息中包括:从第一请求消息中收到的第二中继设备的第一标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;该指示信息用于指示第一核心网设备:远端设备将由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到通过第二中继设备连接网络。The second request message includes: a first identifier of the second relay device received from the first request message, and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device : The remote device will switch from connecting to the network through the first relay device to the network through the second relay device.
可选的,第二请求消息中还包括:从第一请求消息中收到的第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识。Optionally, the second request message further includes: a second identifier of the second relay device camped cell received from the first request message.
第二标识用于,当第二中继设备处于空闲态时,第一核心网设备在第二中继设备驻留小区内进行寻呼。这样可以节省寻呼第二中继设备的网络资源和无线资源。The second identifier is configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the first core network device performs paging in the second relay device camping cell. This can save the paging of the network resources and radio resources of the second relay device.
可选的,第二请求消息中还包括:从第一请求消息中收到的远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。Optionally, the second request message further includes: a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device received from the first request message and the side link bearer identifier between the first relay device.
步骤204b、第一基站向第一核心网设备发送第二请求消息,由第一核心网设备向第二核心网设备发送第三请求消息。Step 204b: The first base station sends a second request message to the first core network device, and the first core network device sends a third request message to the second core network device.
第三请求消息中包括:从第二请求消息中收到的第二中继设备的第一标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;指示信息指示第二核心网设备:远端设备将由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到通过第二中继设备连接网络。The third request message includes: a first identifier of the second relay device received from the second request message and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the indication information indicates the second core network device: the remote end The device will switch from connecting to the network through the first relay device to the network through the second relay device.
可选的,第三请求消息中还包括:从第二请求消息中收到的第一映射关系,第一映射关系即远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。Optionally, the third request message further includes: a first mapping relationship received from the second request message, where the first mapping relationship is a bearer identifier of the remote device and a side link bearer identifier between the first relay device. Mapping relationship.
可选的,第三请求消息中还包括:从第二请求消息中收到的第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识。第二标识用于,当第二中继设备处于空闲态时,第二核心网设备在第二中继设备驻留小区内进行寻呼。这样可以节省寻呼第二中继设备的网络资源。Optionally, the third request message further includes: a second identifier of the second relay device camped cell received from the second request message. The second identifier is configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the second core network device performs paging in the second relay device camping cell. This can save the paging of the network resources of the second relay device.
步骤205、第一基站向远端设备返回针对第一请求消息的响应消息,远端设备接收基站发送的针对第一请求消息的响应消息。 Step 205: The first base station returns a response message for the first request message to the remote device, where the remote device receives the response message sent by the base station for the first request message.
响应消息中包括上述指示信息,远端设备可以根据指示信息,复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标载与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。The response message includes the foregoing indication information, and the remote device may multiplex the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the indication information, where the first mapping relationship is a side link between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the first relay device. A mapping relationship between the bearer identifier and the second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
步骤206、远端设备基于接收到的响应消息,建立与第二中继设备的连接。Step 206: The remote device establishes a connection with the second relay device based on the received response message.
即实现由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到通过第二中继设备连接网络。That is, switching is made by connecting the network through the first relay device to connecting to the network through the second relay device.
下面根据具体的应用场景一~应用场景三对上述图2所示实施例的方法做进一步详细的介绍。The method of the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 is further introduced in detail according to the specific application scenario 1 to application scenario 3.
应用场景一:第一中继设备和第二中继设备的服务基站相同,为第一基站,且第一中继设备和第二中继设备的服务核心网设备也相同,为第一核心网设备。具体的信令交互过程如图3所示。Application scenario 1: The first relay device is the same as the serving base station of the second relay device, and is the first base station, and the service core network devices of the first relay device and the second relay device are also the same, and are the first core network. device. The specific signaling interaction process is shown in Figure 3.
步骤301、第二中继设备广播发现消息(discovery message),远端设备接收该发现消息。Step 301: The second relay device broadcasts a discovery message, and the remote device receives the discovery message.
该发现消息中包含第二中继设备当前驻留小区的进化的统一陆地无线接入网络(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network,E-UTRAN)小区全球标识(E-UTRAN cell global Identifier,ECGI),该发现消息中还包含核心网设备给第二中继设备分配的全球唯一临时标识(Global Unique Temporary Identity,GUTI)。The discovery message includes an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) E-UTRAN global identifier (ECGI) of the evolved second camping device. The discovery message also includes a Global Unique Temporary Identity (GUTI) assigned by the core network device to the second relay device.
远端设备获取发现消息中包含的第二中继设备当前驻留小区的ECGI和第二中继设备的GUTI。The remote device acquires the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device and the GUTI of the second relay device included in the discovery message.
步骤302、远端设备通过第一中继设备向第一基站发送第一请求消息。Step 302: The remote device sends a first request message to the first base station by using the first relay device.
该第一请求消息还可以称为第一切换请求(handover request,HO request)。该第一请求消息中包含指示信息。该指示信息还可以称为中继设备切换指示(Relay Switch Indication),用于指示该请求消息是用于请求在中继设备之间进行切换。可选的,第一请求消息中还包括第二中继设备当前驻留小区的ECGI和第二中继设备的GUTI。The first request message may also be referred to as a first handover request (HO request). The first request message includes indication information. The indication information may also be referred to as a relay switch indication (Relay Switch Indication), for indicating that the request message is used for requesting handover between the relay devices. Optionally, the first request message further includes an ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device and a GUTI of the second relay device.
步骤303、第一基站向第一核心网设备发送第二请求消息。Step 303: The first base station sends a second request message to the first core network device.
第二请求消息还可以成为第二切换请求。该第二请求消息中包括从第一请求消息中获得的指示信息。The second request message can also be the second handover request. The second request message includes indication information obtained from the first request message.
第二请求消息中还可以包括远端设备的标识,该远端设备的标识是第一基站分配给远端设备的。The second request message may further include an identifier of the remote device, where the identifier of the remote device is allocated by the first base station to the remote device.
第二请求消息中还可以包括第二中继设备的GUTI、第二中继设备当前驻留小区的ECGI。The second request message may further include a GUTI of the second relay device and an ECGI of the cell currently camped by the second relay device.
步骤304、第一核心网设备对远端设备能否通过第二中继设备接入网络进行鉴权和授权。Step 304: The first core network device authenticates and authorizes whether the remote device accesses the network through the second relay device.
具体地,第一核心网设备根据指示信息确定远端设备需要通过第二中继设备接入网络。第一核心网设备根据第一基站为远端设备分配的标识获得远端设备的国际移动用户标识(International Mobile Subscriber Identity,IMSI),并根据第二中继设备的GUTI得到第二中继设备的IMSI。第一核心网设备根据远端设备IMSI和第二中继设备的IMSI,对远端设备能否通过第二中继设备接入网络进行鉴权和授权,如果鉴权和授权通过则执行后面的步骤。Specifically, the first core network device determines, according to the indication information, that the remote device needs to access the network through the second relay device. The first core network device obtains an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) of the remote device according to the identifier allocated by the first base station for the remote device, and obtains the second relay device according to the GUTI of the second relay device. IMSI. The first core network device performs authentication and authorization on whether the remote device accesses the network through the second relay device according to the IMSI of the remote device and the IMSI of the second relay device, and if the authentication and authorization are passed, the following is performed. step.
可选的,若第二中继设备处于空闲态,则执行步骤305~310;否则直接执行步骤311。 Optionally, if the second relay device is in the idle state, perform steps 305-310; otherwise, perform step 311 directly.
步骤305、第一核心网设备根据第二中继设备的IMSI查询到第二中继设备处在空闲态,根据第二中继设备当前驻留小区的ECGI确定第二中继设备当前的服务基站,在应用场景一中,第二中继设备当前的服务基站为第一基站。第一核心网设备只向第一基站发送寻呼(Paging)消息,在Paging消息中携带第二中继设备的paging ID和第二中继设备当前驻留小区的ECGI。第二中继设备的paging ID可以是核心网设备分配的EPS系统暂时移动用户标识(EPS TMSI,S-TMSI),或者第二中继设备的IMSI。Step 305: The first core network device queries, according to the IMSI of the second relay device, that the second relay device is in an idle state, and determines, according to the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device, the current serving base station of the second relay device. In the application scenario 1, the current serving base station of the second relay device is the first base station. The first core network device sends a paging message to the first base station, and the paging message carries the paging ID of the second relay device and the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device. The paging ID of the second relay device may be an EPS system temporary mobile subscriber identity (EPS TMSI, S-TMSI) allocated by the core network device, or an IMSI of the second relay device.
步骤306、第一基站根据Paging消息中的ECGI确定第二中继设备当前在处于的小区,则在该小区范围内寻呼第二中继设备。Step 306: The first base station determines, according to the ECGI in the Paging message, that the second relay device is currently in the cell, and then pages the second relay device in the cell range.
步骤307、第二中继设备收到寻呼消息后向第一核心网设备回复服务请求(service request)。Step 307: After receiving the paging message, the second relay device sends a service request to the first core network device.
步骤308、第一核心网设备向第一基站发送初始上下文设置请求(Initial Context Setup Request)。Step 308: The first core network device sends an initial context setup request (Initial Context Setup Request) to the first base station.
初始上下文设置请求中包含第二中继设备的上下文,例如:EPS承载标识(EPS bearer ID)、QoS、S-GW地址(S-GW address)等。The initial context setting request includes a context of the second relay device, such as an EPS bearer ID, a QoS, an S-GW address, and the like.
步骤309、第一基站建立第二中继设备的上下文,并建立和第二中继设备间的RB。Step 309: The first base station establishes a context of the second relay device, and establishes an RB with the second relay device.
步骤310、第一基站发送初始上下文设置完成(Initial Context Setup Complete)给第一核心网设备。Step 310: The first base station sends an initial context setup complete (Initial Context Setup Complete) to the first core network device.
步骤311、第一核心网设备向第一基站回复切换请求响应消息(Handover Request ack)。Step 311: The first core network device returns a handover request response message (Handover Request ack) to the first base station.
切换请求响应消息表征第一基站可以使远端设备切换到第二中继设备,切换请求响应消息中包含第一基站为第二中继设备分配的标识,该标识用于指示第一基站远端设备要切换到的中继设备为第二中继设备。The handover request response message indicates that the first base station can switch the remote device to the second relay device, and the handover request response message includes an identifier that is allocated by the first base station to the second relay device, where the identifier is used to indicate the remote end of the first base station. The relay device to which the device is to be switched is the second relay device.
步骤312、第一基站复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,为远端设备分配新的L2 ID,建立远端设备的L2 ID对应的承载标识和第二中继设备的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。Step 312: The first base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, and allocates a new L2 ID to the remote device, and establishes a bearer identifier corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device and a side link bearer of the second relay device. The mapping relationship of the identity.
第一映射关系为远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标识与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。The first mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is the side link between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the second relay device. The mapping relationship of the bearer identifier.
例如,第一映射关系为远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第一中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系,为远端设备分配新的L2 ID,建立远端设备的L2 ID对应的EPS bearer ID和第二中继设备的DRB ID的映射关系。For example, the first mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the first relay device, and the second mapping relationship is a mapping between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay device. The mapping between the EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device and the DRB ID of the second relay device is established by assigning a new L2 ID to the remote device.
步骤313a、第一基站发送RRC连接重配(RRC Connection Reconfiguration,RRC ConReconf)消息给第二中继设备,第二中继设备返回RRC连接完成(RRC Connection Complete)消息。Step 313: The first base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguration (RRC Conreconf) message to the second relay device, and the second relay device returns an RRC Connection Complete message.
RRC连接重配消息用于通知第二中继设备为远端设备的中继设备。The RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to notify the second relay device that it is a relay device of the remote device.
RRC连接重配消息还可以包括远端设备的L2 ID,远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系,远端设备的L2 ID对应的EPS bearer ID和第二中继设备的DRB ID的映射关系。The RRC connection reconfiguration message may further include an L2 ID of the remote device, a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI of the second relay device, an EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device, and the second middle Following the mapping relationship of the DRB ID of the device.
步骤313b、第一基站发送给RRC连接重配消息第一中继设备,用于通知第一中继设备删除为远端设备中继的相关配置。 Step 313b: The first base station sends the RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first relay device, to notify the first relay device to delete the related configuration that is relayed to the remote device.
步骤313a和步骤313b的执行顺序本申请不作限定,或者,步骤313a和步骤313b可以并行执行。The execution sequence of step 313a and step 313b is not limited herein, or step 313a and step 313b may be performed in parallel.
以及,第一基站发送RRC连接重配消息给远端设备,用于通知远端设备切换到第二中继设备。第一基站在发送给远端设备的RRC连接重配消息中携带以下至少一种信息:指示信息、远端设备和第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的相关配置、远端设备的L2 ID、远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。其中,指示信息用于通知远端设备:该RRC连接重配消息用于实现中继设备间的切换。若远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系未发生变化,则第一基站在发送给远端设备的RRC连接重配消息中不携带此映射关系。And the first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the remote device, to notify the remote device to switch to the second relay device. The first base station carries the following at least one type of information in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device: the indication information, the related configuration of the side link bearer identifier between the remote device and the second relay device, and the remote device The mapping relationship between the L2 ID, the EPS bearer ID of the remote device, and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device. The indication information is used to notify the remote device that the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to implement handover between the relay devices. If the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device does not change, the first base station does not carry the mapping relationship in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device. .
步骤314、远端设备发送间接连接释放(Direct Link Release)消息给第一中继设备,用于断开与第一中继设备的PC5连接,第一中继设备向远端设备返回间接连接释放应答响应。Step 314: The remote device sends an indirect connection release (Direct Link Release) message to the first relay device, where the first relay device disconnects the PC5 connection with the first relay device, and the first relay device returns an indirect connection release to the remote device. Response response.
步骤315、远端设备复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为:远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标识与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。Step 315: The remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, and the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
步骤316、远端设备与第二中继设备建立PC5连接。Step 316: The remote device establishes a PC5 connection with the second relay device.
步骤317、远端设备发送RRC连接重配完成(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)消息给第一基站,用于通知第一基站切换完成。Step 317: The remote device sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) message to the first base station, to notify the first base station that the handover is complete.
通过上述描述,在应用场景一下,采用上述方法能够节省远端设备在中继设备间切换的信令消耗,并且远端设备通过一个间接路径切换到另一个间接路径,在切换过程中远端设备没有断开连接,保持通过间接路径连接基站,保证了远端设备业务连续性。并且,通过核心网设备向指定基站下的特定小区寻呼第二中继设备,节省了寻呼第二中继设备的网络资源。Through the above description, in the application scenario, the above method can save the signaling consumption of the remote device switching between the relay devices, and the remote device switches to another indirect path through an indirect path, and the remote device during the handover process The connection is not disconnected, and the base station is connected through the indirect path to ensure the continuity of the service of the remote device. Moreover, the paging of the second relay device to the specific cell under the designated base station by the core network device saves the paging of the network resource of the second relay device.
应用场景二:第一中继设备的服务基站为第一基站,第二中继设备的服务基站为第二基站,第一中继设备和第二中继设备的服务核心网设备也相同,为第一核心网设备,具体的信令交互过程如图4所示。Application scenario 2: the serving base station of the first relay device is the first base station, and the serving base station of the second relay device is the second base station, and the serving core network devices of the first relay device and the second relay device are also the same. The first core network device, the specific signaling interaction process is shown in FIG. 4 .
步骤401~步骤402和步骤301~步骤302相同,重复之处在此不再赘述。Steps 401 to 402 are the same as steps 301 to 302, and the repeated descriptions are not described herein again.
步骤403、第一基站向第一核心网设备发送第二请求消息。Step 403: The first base station sends a second request message to the first core network device.
第二请求消息还可以成为第二切换请求。该第二请求消息中包括从第一请求消息中获得的指示信息。The second request message can also be the second handover request. The second request message includes indication information obtained from the first request message.
第二请求消息中还可以包括远端设备的标识,该远端设备的标识是第一基站分配给远端设备的。The second request message may further include an identifier of the remote device, where the identifier of the remote device is allocated by the first base station to the remote device.
第二请求消息中还可以包括第二中继设备的GUTI、第二中继设备当前驻留小区的ECGI。The second request message may further include a GUTI of the second relay device and an ECGI of the cell currently camped by the second relay device.
另外,第一基站根据第二中继设备当前驻留小区的ECGI确定第二中继设备的服务基站并不是第一基站,因此,第一基站向第一核心网设备发送的第二请求消息中还包括源到目标容器(Source to target container),该Source to target container中包括远端设备在第一基站中的上下文。In addition, the first base station determines that the serving base station of the second relay device is not the first base station according to the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device, and therefore, the first base station sends the second request message to the first core network device. Also included is a source to target container that includes the context of the remote device in the first base station.
由于第一中继设备和第二中继设备的服务基站不同,远端设备的上下文需要通过核心网设备转发给第二基站。 Since the serving base stations of the first relay device and the second relay device are different, the context of the remote device needs to be forwarded to the second base station by the core network device.
步骤404、第一核心网设备对远端设备能否通过第二中继设备接入网络进行鉴权和授权。具体过程与步骤304相同,在此不再赘述。Step 404: The first core network device authenticates and authorizes whether the remote device accesses the network through the second relay device. The specific process is the same as step 304, and details are not described herein again.
可选的,若第二中继设备处于空闲态,则执行步骤405~410;否则直接执行步骤411。Optionally, if the second relay device is in the idle state, perform steps 405-410; otherwise, perform step 411 directly.
步骤405、第一核心网设备根据第二中继设备的IMSI查询到第二中继设备处在空闲态,根据第二中继设备当前驻留小区的ECGI确定第二中继设备当前的服务基站,在应用场景二中,第二中继设备当前的服务基站为第二基站。第一核心网设备只向第二基站发送寻呼(Paging)消息,在Paging消息中携带第二中继设备的paging ID和第二中继设备当前驻留小区的ECGI。第二中继设备的paging ID可以是核心网设备分配的EPS系统暂时移动用户标识(EPS TMSI,S-TMSI),或者第二中继设备的IMSI。Step 405: The first core network device queries, according to the IMSI of the second relay device, that the second relay device is in an idle state, and determines, according to the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device, the current serving base station of the second relay device. In application scenario 2, the current serving base station of the second relay device is the second base station. The first core network device only sends a paging message to the second base station, where the paging message carries the paging ID of the second relay device and the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device. The paging ID of the second relay device may be an EPS system temporary mobile subscriber identity (EPS TMSI, S-TMSI) allocated by the core network device, or an IMSI of the second relay device.
步骤406、第二基站根据Paging消息中的ECGI确定第二中继设备当前在处于的小区,则在该小区范围内寻呼第二中继设备。Step 406: The second base station determines, according to the ECGI in the Paging message, that the second relay device is currently in the cell, and then pages the second relay device in the cell range.
步骤407、第二中继设备收到寻呼消息后向第一核心网设备回复服务请求。Step 407: After receiving the paging message, the second relay device returns a service request to the first core network device.
步骤408、第一核心网设备向第二基站发送初始上下文设置请求(Initial Context Setup Request)。Step 408: The first core network device sends an initial context setup request (Initial Context Setup Request) to the second base station.
初始上下文设置请求中包含第二中继设备的上下文,例如:EPS承载标识(EPS bearer ID)、QoS、S-GW地址(S-GW address)等。The initial context setting request includes a context of the second relay device, such as an EPS bearer ID, a QoS, an S-GW address, and the like.
步骤409、第二基站建立第二中继设备的上下文,并建立和第二中继设备间的RB。Step 409: The second base station establishes a context of the second relay device, and establishes an RB with the second relay device.
步骤410、第二基站发送初始上下文设置完成(Initial Context Setup Complete)给第一核心网设备。Step 410: The second base station sends an initial context setup complete (Initial Context Setup Complete) to the first core network device.
步骤411、第一核心网设备向第二基站回复切换请求消息(Handover Request)。Step 411: The first core network device returns a handover request message (Handover Request) to the second base station.
切换请求响应消息表征第二基站可以使远端设备切换到第二中继设备,切换请求响应消息中包含第一核心网设备为远端设备分配的标识、第二基站为第二中继设备分配的标识。切换请求响应消息还可以包括Source to target container。切换请求响应消息还可以包括指示信息。其中,第二基站为第二中继设备分配的标识用于指示第二中继设备此次切换为中继设备间的切换,而非从间接路径切换到直接路径(即远端设备从间接路径连接网络切换到直接路径连接网络)。The handover request response message indicates that the second base station can switch the remote device to the second relay device, and the handover request response message includes the identifier allocated by the first core network device for the remote device, and the second base station allocates the identifier for the second relay device. Logo. The handover request response message may also include a Source to target container. The handover request response message may also include indication information. The identifier allocated by the second base station to the second relay device is used to indicate that the second relay device switches to the handover between the relay devices instead of switching from the indirect path to the direct path (ie, the remote device from the indirect path) Connect the network to switch to the direct path connection network).
步骤412、第二基站根据Source to Target Container中的远端设备的上下文,复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第一中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系。第二基站为远端设备分配新的L2 ID,建立远端设备的L2 ID对应的EPS bearer ID和第二中继设备的DRB ID的映射关系。Step 412: The second base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the context of the remote device in the Source to Target Container, where the first mapping relationship is between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the first relay device. The mapping relationship between the SLBI and the second mapping relationship is the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay devices. The second base station allocates a new L2 ID to the remote device, and establishes a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device and the DRB ID of the second relay device.
步骤413、第二基站发送RRC连接重配(RRC Connection Reconfiguration,RRC ConReconf)消息给第二中继设备,第二中继设备返回RRC连接完成(RRC Connection Complete)消息。Step 413: The second base station sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguration (RRC Conreconf) message to the second relay device, and the second relay device returns an RRC Connection Complete message.
RRC ConReconf用于通知第二中继设备为远端设备的中继设备。The RRC ConReconf is used to notify the second relay device that it is a relay device of the remote device.
RRC连接重配消息还可以包括远端设备的L2 ID,远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系,远端设备的L2 ID对应的EPS bearer ID和第二中继设备的DRB ID的映射关系。The RRC connection reconfiguration message may further include an L2 ID of the remote device, a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI of the second relay device, an EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device, and the second middle Following the mapping relationship of the DRB ID of the device.
步骤414、第二基站向第一核心网设备发送切换请求响应(HO request ack),用于通知第一核心网设备切换准备已经完成、远端设备可以通过第二中继设备接入网络。 Step 414: The second base station sends a handover request response (HO request ack) to the first core network device, to notify the first core network device that the handover preparation is complete, and the remote device can access the network through the second relay device.
其中HO request ack中包含Target to source container,该container中包含第二基站分配给远端设备的L2 ID,远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系。The HO request ack includes a Target to source container, and the container includes an L2 ID assigned by the second base station to the remote device, and a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay device.
步骤415、第一核心网设备发送切换命令(HO Command)给第一基站,通知第一基站对远端设备的切换准备已经完成。Step 415: The first core network device sends a handover command (HO Command) to the first base station, and notifies the first base station that the handover preparation for the remote device has been completed.
其中该切换命令中包含Target to source container。The switch command includes a Target to source container.
步骤416a、第一基站发送RRC连接重配消息第一中继设备,用于通知第一中继设备删除为远端设备中继的相关配置。Step 416: The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first relay device, to notify the first relay device to delete the related configuration that is relayed to the remote device.
步骤416b、第一基站发送RRC连接重配消息给远端设备,用于通知远端设备切换到第二中继设备。Step 416b: The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the remote device, to notify the remote device to switch to the second relay device.
第一基站在发送给远端设备的RRC连接重配消息中可以携带以下至少一种信息:指示信息、远端设备和第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的相关配置、远端设备的L2 ID、远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。其中,指示信息用于通知远端设备:该RRC连接重配消息用于实现中继设备间的切换。若远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系未发生变化,则第一基站在发送给远端设备的RRC连接重配消息中不携带此映射关系。The first base station may carry at least one of the following information in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device: the indication information, the related configuration of the side link bearer identifier between the remote device and the second relay device, and the remote device The mapping relationship between the L2 ID, the EPS bearer ID of the remote device, and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay devices. The indication information is used to notify the remote device that the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to implement handover between the relay devices. If the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device does not change, the first base station does not carry the mapping relationship in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device. .
步骤416a和步骤416b的执行顺序本申请不作限定,或者,步骤416a和步骤416b可以并行执行。The order of execution of steps 416a and 416b is not limited herein, or steps 416a and 416b may be performed in parallel.
步骤417、远端设备发送间接连接释放(Direct Link Release)消息给第一中继设备,用于断开与第一中继设备的PC5连接,第一中继设备向远端设备返回间接连接释放应答响应。Step 417: The remote device sends an indirect connection release (Direct Link Release) message to the first relay device, where the first relay device disconnects the PC5 connection with the first relay device, and the first relay device returns an indirect connection release to the remote device. Response response.
步骤418、远端设备复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为:远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标识与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。Step 418: The remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, and the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
步骤419、远端设备与第二中继设备建立PC5连接。Step 419: The remote device establishes a PC5 connection with the second relay device.
步骤420、远端设备发送RRC连接重配完成(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)消息给第二基站,用于通知第二基站切换完成。Step 420: The remote device sends an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) message to the second base station, to notify the second base station that the handover is complete.
通过上述描述,在应用场景二下,采用上述方法能够节省远端设备在中继设备间切换的信令消耗,并且远端设备通过一个间接路径切换到另一个间接路径,在切换过程中远端设备没有断开连接,保持通过间接路径连接基站,保证了远端设备业务连续性。并且,通过核心网设备向指定基站下的特定小区寻呼第二中继设备,节省了寻呼第二中继设备的网络资源。Through the above description, in the application scenario 2, the above method can save the signaling consumption of the remote device switching between the relay devices, and the remote device switches to another indirect path through an indirect path, and the remote device is in the process of switching. The device is not disconnected, and the base station is connected through an indirect path to ensure the continuity of the remote device service. Moreover, the paging of the second relay device to the specific cell under the designated base station by the core network device saves the paging of the network resource of the second relay device.
应用场景三:第一中继设备的服务基站为第一基站,第二中继设备的服务基站为第二基站,第一中继设备的服务核心网设备为第一核心网设备,第二中继设备的服核心网设备务为第二核心网设备。具体的信令交互过程如图5所示。Application scenario 3: the serving base station of the first relay device is the first base station, the serving base station of the second relay device is the second base station, and the serving core network device of the first relay device is the first core network device, and the second The service core network device of the device is the second core network device. The specific signaling interaction process is shown in Figure 5.
步骤501~步骤503与步骤401~步骤403相同,重复之处在此不再赘述。Steps 501 to 503 are the same as steps 401 to 403, and the repeated descriptions are not described herein again.
步骤504、第一核心网设备向第二核心网设备发送第三请求消息。Step 504: The first core network device sends a third request message to the second core network device.
具体地,第一核心网设备从第二请求消息中获取远端设备的IMSI,根据第二中继设备的GUTI确定第二中继设备的服务核心网设备并非第一核心网设备,则第一核心网设备根据第二中继设备的GUTI,向第二核心网设备发送第三请求消息,其中,第三请求消息中包 括以下至少一种:从第二请求消息中获得的指示信息、远端设备的IMSI、第二中继设备的GUTI、第二中继设备当前驻留的ECGI、Source to target container、第一核心网设备内远端设备的上下文。Specifically, the first core network device obtains the IMSI of the remote device from the second request message, and determines that the serving core network device of the second relay device is not the first core network device according to the GUTI of the second relay device, and then The core network device sends a third request message to the second core network device according to the GUTI of the second relay device, where the third request message is included in the packet At least one of the following: the indication information obtained from the second request message, the IMSI of the remote device, the GUTI of the second relay device, the ECGI currently hosted by the second relay device, the Source to target container, the first core The context of the remote device within the network device.
步骤505、第二核心网设备对远端设备能否通过第二中继设备接入网络进行鉴权和授权。Step 505: The second core network device authenticates and authorizes whether the remote device accesses the network through the second relay device.
具体地,第二核心网设备根据指示信息确定远端设备需要通过第二中继设备接入网络,则根据第二中继设备的GUTI确定第二中继设备的IMSI,根据远端设备的IMSI和第二中继设备的IMSI,对远端设备能否通过第二中继设备接入网络进行鉴权和授权,如果鉴权和授权通过则执行后面的步骤。Specifically, the second core network device determines, according to the indication information, that the remote device needs to access the network through the second relay device, and determines the IMSI of the second relay device according to the GUTI of the second relay device, according to the IMSI of the remote device. And the IMSI of the second relay device, whether the remote device can access the network through the second relay device for authentication and authorization, and if the authentication and authorization are passed, the subsequent steps are performed.
可选的,若第二中继设备处于空闲态,则执行步骤506~511;否则直接执行步骤512。Optionally, if the second relay device is in the idle state, perform steps 506-511; otherwise, perform step 512 directly.
步骤506、第二核心网设备根据第二中继设备的IMSI查询到第二中继设备处在空闲态,根据第二中继设备当前驻留小区的ECGI确定第二中继设备当前的服务基站,在应用场景三中,第二中继设备当前的服务基站为第二基站。第二核心网设备只向第二基站发送寻呼(Paging)消息,在Paging消息中携带第二中继设备的paging ID和第二中继设备当前驻留小区的ECGI。第二中继设备的paging ID可以是核心网设备分配的EPS系统暂时移动用户标识(EPS TMSI,S-TMSI),或者第二中继设备的IMSI。Step 506: The second core network device queries, according to the IMSI of the second relay device, that the second relay device is in an idle state, and determines, according to the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device, the current serving base station of the second relay device. In the application scenario 3, the current serving base station of the second relay device is the second base station. The second core network device only sends a paging message to the second base station, where the paging message carries the paging ID of the second relay device and the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device. The paging ID of the second relay device may be an EPS system temporary mobile subscriber identity (EPS TMSI, S-TMSI) allocated by the core network device, or an IMSI of the second relay device.
步骤507、第二基站根据Paging消息中的ECGI确定第二中继设备当前在处于的小区,则在该小区范围内寻呼第二中继设备。Step 507: The second base station determines, according to the ECGI in the Paging message, that the second relay device is currently in the cell, and then pages the second relay device in the cell range.
步骤508、第二中继设备收到寻呼消息后向第二核心网设备回复服务请求。Step 508: After receiving the paging message, the second relay device returns a service request to the second core network device.
步骤509、第二核心网设备向第二基站发送初始上下文设置请求(Initial Context Setup Request)。Step 509: The second core network device sends an initial context setup request (Initial Context Setup Request) to the second base station.
Initial Context Setup Request中包含第二中继设备的上下文,例如:EPS承载标识(EPS bearer ID)、QoS、S-GW地址(S-GW address)。The Initial Context Setup Request includes the context of the second relay device, such as an EPS bearer ID, a QoS, and an S-GW address.
步骤510、第二基站建立第二中继设备的上下文,并建立和第二中继设备间的RB。Step 510: The second base station establishes a context of the second relay device, and establishes an RB with the second relay device.
步骤511、第二基站发送初始上下文设置完成(Initial Context Setup Complete)给第二核心网设备。Step 511: The second base station sends an initial context setup complete (Initial Context Setup Complete) to the second core network device.
步骤512、第二核心网设备向第二基站回复切换请求消息(Handover Request)。Step 512: The second core network device returns a handover request message (Handover Request) to the second base station.
Handover Request中包含第二核心网设备为远端设备分配的标识、第二基站为第二中继设备分配的标识、Source to Target Container,Container中包括远端设备上下文。The Handover Request includes an identifier assigned by the second core network device to the remote device, an identifier assigned by the second base station to the second relay device, and a Source to Target Container, where the container includes the remote device context.
Handover Request中还可以包含指示信息,指示信息用于指示第二中继设备此次切换为中继设备间的切换,而非从间接路径切换到直接路径(即远端设备从间接路径连接网络切换到直接路径连接网络)。The Handover Request may further include indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the second relay device switches to the handover between the relay devices instead of switching from the indirect path to the direct path (that is, the remote device switches from the indirect path connection network) Connect to the network directly.)
第二基站为第二中继设备分配的标识也用于指示第二中继设备此次切换为中继设备间的切换,而非从间接路径切换到直接路径(即远端设备从间接路径连接网络切换到直接路径连接网络)。The identifier assigned by the second base station to the second relay device is also used to indicate that the second relay device switches to the handover between the relay devices instead of switching from the indirect path to the direct path (ie, the remote device connects from the indirect path). The network switches to the direct path connection network).
步骤513、第二基站根据Source to Target Container中的远端设备上下文,复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第一中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系。第二基站为远端设备分配新的L2 ID,建立远端设备的L2 ID对应的EPS bearer ID和第二中继设备的DRB ID的映射关系。 Step 513: The second base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the remote device context in the Source to Target Container, where the first mapping relationship is between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the first relay device. The mapping relationship between the SLBI and the second mapping relationship is the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay device. The second base station allocates a new L2 ID to the remote device, and establishes a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device and the DRB ID of the second relay device.
步骤514、第二基站发送RRC连接重配消息给第二中继设备,第二中继设备返回RRC连接完成(RRC Connection Complete)消息。Step 514: The second base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second relay device, and the second relay device returns an RRC Connection Complete message.
RRC连接重配消息用于通知第二中继设备为远端设备的中继设备。The RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to notify the second relay device that it is a relay device of the remote device.
RRC连接重配消息还可以包括远端设备的L2 ID,远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系,远端设备的L2 ID对应的EPS bearer ID和第二中继设备的DRB ID的映射关系。The RRC connection reconfiguration message may further include an L2 ID of the remote device, a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI of the second relay device, an EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device, and the second middle Following the mapping relationship of the DRB ID of the device.
步骤515、第二基站发送切换请求响应(HO request ack)给第二核心网设备,用于通知第二核心网设备切换准备已经完成、远端设备可以通过第二中继设备接入网络。Step 515: The second base station sends a handover request response (HO request ack) to the second core network device, to notify the second core network device that the handover preparation is completed, and the remote device can access the network through the second relay device.
其中HO request ack中包含Target to source container,该container中包含第二基站分配给远端设备的L2 ID,远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系。The HO request ack includes a Target to source container, and the container includes an L2 ID assigned by the second base station to the remote device, and a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay device.
步骤516、第二核心网设备发送正向迁移响应(Forward Relocation Response)给第一核心网设备,在Forward Relocation Response中携带Target to source container。Step 516: The second core network device sends a Forward Relocation Response to the first core network device, and carries a Target to source container in the Forward Relocation Response.
步骤517、第一核心网设备发送切换命令(HO Command)给第一基站,通知第一基站对远端设备的切换准备已经完成。Step 517: The first core network device sends a handover command (HO Command) to the first base station, and notifies the first base station that the handover preparation for the remote device has been completed.
其中该切换命令中包含Target to source container。The switch command includes a Target to source container.
步骤518a、第一基站发送RRC连接重配消息第一中继设备,用于通知第一中继设备删除为远端设备中继的相关配置。Step 518a: The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first relay device, to notify the first relay device to delete the related configuration that is relayed to the remote device.
步骤518b、第一基站发送RRC连接重配消息给远端设备,用于通知远端设备切换到第二中继设备。Step 518b: The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the remote device, to notify the remote device to switch to the second relay device.
步骤518a和步骤518b的执行顺序本申请不作限定,或者,步骤518a和步骤518b可以并行执行。The order of execution of step 518a and step 518b is not limited herein, or step 518a and step 518b may be performed in parallel.
第一基站在发送给远端设备的RRC连接重配消息中可以携带以下至少一种信息:指示信息、远端设备和第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的相关配置、远端设备的L2 ID、远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。其中,指示信息用于通知远端设备:该RRC连接重配消息用于实现中继设备间的切换。若远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系未发生变化,则第一基站在发送给远端设备的RRC连接重配消息中不携带此映射关系。The first base station may carry at least one of the following information in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device: the indication information, the related configuration of the side link bearer identifier between the remote device and the second relay device, and the remote device The mapping relationship between the L2 ID, the EPS bearer ID of the remote device, and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay devices. The indication information is used to notify the remote device that the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to implement handover between the relay devices. If the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device does not change, the first base station does not carry the mapping relationship in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device. .
步骤519、远端设备发送间接连接释放(Direct Link Release)消息给第一中继设备,用于断开与第一中继设备的PC5连接,第一中继设备向远端设备返回间接连接释放应答响应。Step 519: The remote device sends an indirect connection release (Direct Link Release) message to the first relay device, where the first relay device disconnects the PC5 connection with the first relay device, and the first relay device returns an indirect connection release to the remote device. Response response.
步骤520、远端设备复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为:远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标识与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。Step 520: The remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, and the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
步骤521、远端设备与第二中继设备建立PC5连接。Step 521: The remote device establishes a PC5 connection with the second relay device.
步骤522、远端设备发送RRC连接重配完成消息给第二基站,用于通知第二基站切换完成。Step 522: The remote device sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second base station, to notify the second base station that the handover is complete.
通过上述描述,在应用场景三下,第一中继设备与第二中继设备的服务基站和服务核心网设备都不同,因此远端设备的上下文需要从第一基站经过第一核心网设备、第二核心网设备传递到第二基站。采用上述方法能够节省远端设备在中继设备间切换的信令消耗, 并且远端设备通过一个间接路径切换到另一个间接路径,在切换过程中远端设备没有断开连接,保持通过间接路径连接基站,保证了远端设备业务连续性。并且,通过核心网设备向指定基站下的特定小区寻呼第二中继设备,节省了寻呼第二中继设备的网络资源。With the above description, in the application scenario 3, the first relay device is different from the serving base station and the serving core network device of the second relay device. Therefore, the context of the remote device needs to pass through the first core network device from the first base station. The second core network device is passed to the second base station. The above method can save the signaling consumption of the remote device switching between the relay devices. Moreover, the remote device switches to another indirect path through an indirect path, and the remote device does not disconnect during the handover process, and maintains the connection to the base station through the indirect path, thereby ensuring service continuity of the remote device. Moreover, the paging of the second relay device to the specific cell under the designated base station by the core network device saves the paging of the network resource of the second relay device.
如图6所示,远端设备也可以通过第二中继设备发起切换请求,具体如下述步骤所述。As shown in FIG. 6, the remote device may also initiate a handover request by using the second relay device, as described in the following steps.
步骤601、远端设备通过第一中继设备连接网络。Step 601: The remote device connects to the network by using the first relay device.
步骤602、远端设备向第二中继设备发送第一请求消息,第二中继设备接收远端设备发送的第一请求消息。Step 602: The remote device sends a first request message to the second relay device, where the second relay device receives the first request message sent by the remote device.
其中,第一请求消息中包括:远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;该第一请求消息用于请求第二中继设备向网络发起请求,以将远端设备由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到通过第二中继设备连接网络。The first request message includes: an identifier of the remote device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the first request message is used to request the second relay device to initiate a request to the network to remotely The device switches from connecting to the network through the first relay device to the network through the second relay device.
第二中继设备在接收到第一请求消息后,会根据第一请求消息向网络发起请求,该请求用于将远端设备由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到通过第二中继设备连接网络。After receiving the first request message, the second relay device sends a request to the network according to the first request message, where the request is used to switch the remote device from the first relay device to the network through the second relay device. Connect Network.
具体地,若第一中继设备的服务基站为第一基站、第二中继设备的服务基站为第二基站,服务第一中继设备的核心网设备为第一核心网设备,服务第二中继设备的核心网设备为第二核心网设备,则执行步骤603a~步骤611a;若服务第一中继设备和服务第二中继设备的核心网设备均为第一核心网设备,则执行步骤603b~步骤607b。Specifically, if the serving base station of the first relay device is the first base station, and the serving base station of the second relay device is the second base station, the core network device serving the first relay device is the first core network device, and the service is second. If the core network device of the relay device is the second core network device, step 603a to step 611a are performed; if the core network device serving the first relay device and the second relay device is the first core network device, executing Step 603b to step 607b.
步骤603a、第二中继设备向第二核心网设备发送第二请求消息,第二核心网设备接收第二中继设备发送的第二请求消息。Step 603a: The second relay device sends a second request message to the second core network device, where the second core network device receives the second request message sent by the second relay device.
第二请求消息中包括:从第一请求消息中收到的远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息。The second request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the first request message and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices.
步骤604a、第二核心网设备向第一核心网设备发送第三请求消息,第二核心网设备接收第一核心网设备发送的第三请求消息。Step 604a: The second core network device sends a third request message to the first core network device, where the second core network device receives the third request message sent by the first core network device.
第三请求消息中包括:从第二请求消息中收到的远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,指示信息用于指示第一核心网设备:远端设备将由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到通过第二中继设备连接网络。The third request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the second request message, and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device is to be The network is switched by the first relay device to connect to the network through the second relay device.
步骤605a、第一核心网设备向第一基站发送上下文请求消息,第一基站接收第一核心网设备发送的上下文请求消息。Step 605a: The first core network device sends a context request message to the first base station, where the first base station receives the context request message sent by the first core network device.
该上下文请求消息中包括第一基站为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识。The context request message includes an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station to the remote device.
步骤606a、第一基站向第一核心网设备返回上下文响应消息。Step 606a: The first base station returns a context response message to the first core network device.
该上下文响应消息中包括第一核心网设备为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识、远端设备在第一基站的上下文信息。The context response message includes an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first core network device for the remote device, and context information of the remote device at the first base station.
步骤607a、第一核心网设备向第二核心网设备发送第三请求消息的响应消息,第二核心网设备接收第一核心网设备发送的响应消息。Step 607a: The first core network device sends a response message of the third request message to the second core network device, where the second core network device receives the response message sent by the first core network device.
第三请求消息的响应消息中包括远端设备的标识、远端设备在第一核心网设备的上下文信息、远端设备在第一基站的上下文信息。The response message of the third request message includes the identifier of the remote device, the context information of the remote device on the first core network device, and the context information of the remote device at the first base station.
步骤608a、第二核心网设备向第二基站发送第二请求消息的响应消息,第二基站接收第二核心网设备发送的第二请求消息的响应消息。Step 608a: The second core network device sends a response message of the second request message to the second base station, and the second base station receives the response message of the second request message sent by the second core network device.
该第二请求消息的响应消息中包括远端设备在第一基站的上下文信息、第二核心网设备为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识、第二基站为第二中继设备分配的用于S1接口的标识,第二基站为第二中继设备分配的用于S1接口的标识用于通知第二中继设备:远端 设备将切换到由第二中继设备连接网络。The response message of the second request message includes the context information of the remote device at the first base station, the identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the second core network device for the remote device, and the second base station allocated for the second relay device. For the identifier of the S1 interface, the identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the second base station to the second relay device is used to notify the second relay device: the remote end The device will switch to the network connected by the second relay device.
步骤609a、第二基站复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系。Step 609a: The second base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship.
第一映射关系为:远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标载与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。The first mapping relationship is: a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is the side between the bearer label of the remote device and the second relay device. The mapping relationship between the link bearer identifiers.
步骤610a、第一基站向远端设备发送响应消息,例如响应消息为重配置消息,远端设备接收第一基站发送的响应消息。Step 610a: The first base station sends a response message to the remote device, for example, the response message is a reconfiguration message, and the remote device receives the response message sent by the first base station.
重配置消息中包括用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息。The reconfiguration message includes indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices.
远端设备根据重配置消息复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为:远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标载与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。The remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the reconfiguration message, where the first mapping relationship is: a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the first relay device, and second The mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
步骤611a、远端设备基于接收到的响应消息,建立与第二中继设备的连接。Step 611a: The remote device establishes a connection with the second relay device based on the received response message.
即实现由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到通过第二中继设备连接网络。That is, switching is made by connecting the network through the first relay device to connecting to the network through the second relay device.
步骤603b、第二中继设备向第一核心网设备发送第二请求消息,第一核心网设备接收第二中继设备发送的第二请求消息。Step 603b: The second relay device sends a second request message to the first core network device, where the first core network device receives the second request message sent by the second relay device.
第二请求消息中包括:从第一请求消息中收到的远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,指示信息用于指示第一核心网设备:远端设备将由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到通过第二中继设备连接网络The second request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the first request message and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device is to be Switching to the network through the first relay device to the network through the second relay device
步骤604b、第一核心网设备向第二中继设备的服务基站发送第四请求消息,第二中继设备的服务基站接收第一核心网设备发送的第四请求消息。Step 604b: The first core network device sends a fourth request message to the serving base station of the second relay device, and the serving base station of the second relay device receives the fourth request message sent by the first core network device.
第四请求消息用于指示第二中继设备的服务基站:获取第一映射关系,复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为:远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标载与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。The fourth request message is used to indicate the serving base station of the second relay device: the first mapping relationship is obtained, and the first mapping relationship is multiplexed to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: the bearer identifier of the remote device and the first middle The second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
若第一中继设备和第二中继设备的服务基站均为第一基站,则第四请求消息中包括第一基站为远端设备分配的标识、第一基站为第二中继设备分配的标识;If the serving base station of the first relay device and the second relay device are both the first base station, the fourth request message includes the identifier allocated by the first base station for the remote device, and the first base station is allocated for the second relay device. Identification
若第一中继设备的服务基站为第一基站、第二中继设备的服务基站为第二基站,则第四请求消息中包括第一基站为远端设备分配的标识、第一基站为第二中继设备分配的标识、和第一基站的标识。进一步地,则第二基站接收第一核心网设备发送的第四请求消息后,第二基站根据第四请求消息中第一基站的标识,向第一基站发送上下文请求消息,第一基站接收第二基站发送的上下文请求消息,向第二基站返回上下文响应消息。该上下文请求消息中可以包括从第四请求消息中获取的第一基站为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识、第二基站为远端设备分配的用于X2接口的标识。该上下文响应消息中可以包括第一基站为远端设备分配的用于X2接口的标识、第二基站为远端设备分配的用于X2接口的标识、和远端设备的上下文信息。If the serving base station of the first relay device is the first base station, and the serving base station of the second relay device is the second base station, the fourth request message includes the identifier allocated by the first base station to the remote device, and the first base station is the first base station. The identifier assigned by the second relay device and the identifier of the first base station. Further, after the second base station receives the fourth request message sent by the first core network device, the second base station sends a context request message to the first base station according to the identifier of the first base station in the fourth request message, and the first base station receives the first request message. The context request message sent by the second base station returns a context response message to the second base station. The context request message may include an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station for the remote device, and an identifier for the X2 interface allocated by the second base station to the remote device, obtained from the fourth request message. The context response message may include an identifier for the X2 interface allocated by the first base station for the remote device, an identifier for the X2 interface allocated by the second base station for the remote device, and context information of the remote device.
步骤605b、第二中继设备的服务基站复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系。Step 605b: The serving base station of the second relay device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship.
步骤606b、第一基站向远端设备发送响应消息,例如响应消息为重配置消息,远端设备接收第一基站发送的响应消息。Step 606b: The first base station sends a response message to the remote device, for example, the response message is a reconfiguration message, and the remote device receives the response message sent by the first base station.
响应消息中包括用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息。The response message includes indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices.
远端设备根据重配置消息复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为:远端 设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标载与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。The remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the reconfiguration message, where the first mapping relationship is: A mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device.
步骤607b、远端设备基于接收到的响应消息,建立与第二中继设备的连接。Step 607b: The remote device establishes a connection with the second relay device based on the received response message.
即实现由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到通过第二中继设备连接网络。That is, switching is made by connecting the network through the first relay device to connecting to the network through the second relay device.
下面根据具体的应用场景一~应用场景三对上述图6所示实施例的方法做进一步详细的介绍。The method of the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 is further introduced in detail according to the specific application scenario 1 to application scenario 3.
应用场景四:第一中继设备和第二中继设备的服务基站相同,为第一基站,且第一中继设备和第二中继设备的服务核心网设备也相同,为第一核心网设备。具体的信令交互过程如图7所示。Application scenario 4: The first relay device is the same as the serving base station of the second relay device, and is the first base station, and the serving core network device of the first relay device and the second relay device are also the same, and is the first core network. device. The specific signaling interaction process is shown in Figure 7.
步骤701、第二中继设备广播发现消息(discovery message),远端设备接收该发现消息。Step 701: The second relay device broadcasts a discovery message, and the remote device receives the discovery message.
该发现消息中包含第二中继设备当前驻留小区的ECGI,该发现消息中还包含核心网设备给第二中继设备分配的GUTI。The discovery message includes an ECGI of a cell currently camped by the second relay device, and the discovery message further includes a GUTI allocated by the core network device to the second relay device.
远端设备获取发现消息中包含的第二中继设备当前驻留小区的ECGI和第二中继设备的GUTI。The remote device acquires the ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device and the GUTI of the second relay device included in the discovery message.
步骤702、远端设备向第二中继设备发送第一请求消息。Step 702: The remote device sends a first request message to the second relay device.
该第一请求消息还可以称为第一切换请求(HO request)。该第一请求消息中包含指示信息。该指示信息还可以称为中继设备切换指示(Relay Switch Indication),用于指示该请求消息是用于请求在中继设备之间进行切换。可选的,第一请求消息中还包括第二中继设备当前驻留小区的ECGI和第二中继设备的GUTI。The first request message may also be referred to as a first handover request (HO request). The first request message includes indication information. The indication information may also be referred to as a relay switch indication (Relay Switch Indication), for indicating that the request message is used for requesting handover between the relay devices. Optionally, the first request message further includes an ECGI of the currently camped cell of the second relay device and a GUTI of the second relay device.
步骤703、第二中继设备向第一核心网设备发送第二请求消息,第一核心网设备接收第二中继设备发送的第二请求消息。Step 703: The second relay device sends a second request message to the first core network device, where the first core network device receives the second request message sent by the second relay device.
第二请求消息可以为服务请求(service request),该服务请求中包括从第一请求消息中获取的指示信息和远端设备的GUTI。指示信息用于指示该服务请求是为向远端设备提供中继服务而发起的。The second request message may be a service request, where the service request includes the indication information obtained from the first request message and the GUTI of the remote device. The indication information is used to indicate that the service request is initiated to provide a relay service to the remote device.
步骤704、第一核心网设备对远端设备能否通过第二中继设备接入网络进行鉴权和授权。Step 704: The first core network device authenticates and authorizes whether the remote device accesses the network through the second relay device.
具体地,第一核心网设备根据指示信息确定远端设备需要通过第二中继设备接入网络,则根据第二中继设备的GUTI确定第二中继设备的IMSI,根据远端设备的IMSI和第二中继设备的IMSI,对远端设备能否通过第二中继设备接入网络进行鉴权和授权,如果鉴权和授权通过则执行后面的步骤。Specifically, the first core network device determines, according to the indication information, that the remote device needs to access the network through the second relay device, and determines the IMSI of the second relay device according to the GUTI of the second relay device, according to the IMSI of the remote device. And the IMSI of the second relay device, whether the remote device can access the network through the second relay device for authentication and authorization, and if the authentication and authorization are passed, the subsequent steps are performed.
可选的,若第二中继设备处于空闲态,则执行步骤705~707;否则执行步骤708。Optionally, if the second relay device is in an idle state, steps 705-707 are performed; otherwise, step 708 is performed.
步骤705、第一核心网设备向第一基站发送初始上下文设置请求(Initial Context Setup Request)。Step 705: The first core network device sends an initial context setup request (Initial Context Setup Request) to the first base station.
Initial Context Setup Request中包含第二中继设备的上下文,例如:EPS承载标识(EPS bearer ID)、QoS、S-GW地址(S-GW address)。The Initial Context Setup Request includes the context of the second relay device, such as an EPS bearer ID, a QoS, and an S-GW address.
步骤706、第一基站建立第二中继设备的上下文,并建立和第二中继设备间的RB。Step 706: The first base station establishes a context of the second relay device, and establishes an RB with the second relay device.
步骤707、第一基站发送初始上下文设置完成(Initial Context Setup Complete)给第一核心网设备。Step 707: The first base station sends an initial context setup complete (Initial Context Setup Complete) to the first core network device.
步骤708、第一核心网设备向第一基站回复切换请求消息(Handover Request)。 Step 708: The first core network device returns a handover request message (Handover Request) to the first base station.
Handover Request中包含第一基站为第二中继设备分配的用于S1接口的标识、第一基站为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识。The Handover Request includes an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station for the second relay device, and an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station to the remote device.
步骤709、第一基站根据第一基站为第二中继设备分配的用于S1接口的标识,复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第一中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系。第一基站为远端设备分配新的L2 ID,建立远端设备的L2 ID对应的EPS bearer ID和第二中继设备的DRB ID的映射关系。Step 709: The first base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the identifier used by the first base station for the second relay device for the S1 interface, where the first mapping relationship is the EPS bearer ID of the remote device. The mapping relationship between the first relay device and the SLBI, and the second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay devices. The first base station allocates a new L2 ID to the remote device, and establishes a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device and the DRB ID of the second relay device.
步骤710、第一基站发送RRC连接重配消息给第二中继设备,第二中继设备返回RRC连接完成(RRC Connection Complete)消息。Step 710: The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second relay device, and the second relay device returns an RRC Connection Complete message.
RRC连接重配消息用于通知第二中继设备为远端设备的中继设备。The RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to notify the second relay device that it is a relay device of the remote device.
RRC连接重配消息还可以包括远端设备的L2 ID,远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系,远端设备的L2 ID对应的EPS bearer ID和第二中继设备的DRB ID的映射关系。The RRC connection reconfiguration message may further include an L2 ID of the remote device, a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI of the second relay device, an EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device, and the second middle Following the mapping relationship of the DRB ID of the device.
步骤711a、第一基站发送RRC连接重配消息第一中继设备,用于通知第一中继设备删除为远端设备中继的相关配置。Step 711a: The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first relay device, to notify the first relay device to delete the related configuration that is relayed to the remote device.
步骤711b、第一基站发送RRC连接重配消息给远端设备,用于通知远端设备切换到第二中继设备。Step 711b: The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the remote device, to notify the remote device to switch to the second relay device.
第一基站在发送给远端设备的RRC连接重配消息中可以携带以下至少一种信息:指示信息、远端设备和第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的相关配置、远端设备的L2 ID、远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。其中,指示信息用于通知远端设备:该RRC连接重配消息用于实现中继设备间的切换。若远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系未发生变化,则第一基站在发送给远端设备的RRC连接重配消息中不携带此映射关系。The first base station may carry at least one of the following information in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device: the indication information, the related configuration of the side link bearer identifier between the remote device and the second relay device, and the remote device The mapping relationship between the L2 ID, the EPS bearer ID of the remote device, and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay devices. The indication information is used to notify the remote device that the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to implement handover between the relay devices. If the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device does not change, the first base station does not carry the mapping relationship in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device. .
步骤711a和步骤711b的执行顺序本申请不作限定,或者,步骤711a和步骤711b可以并行执行。The execution sequence of step 711a and step 711b is not limited herein, or step 711a and step 711b may be performed in parallel.
步骤712、远端设备发送间接连接释放(Direct Link Release)消息给第一中继设备,用于断开与第一中继设备的PC5连接,第一中继设备向远端设备返回间接连接释放应答响应。Step 712: The remote device sends an indirect connection release (Direct Link Release) message to the first relay device, where the first relay device disconnects the PC5 connection with the first relay device, and the first relay device returns an indirect connection release to the remote device. Response response.
步骤713、远端设备复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为:远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标识与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。Step 713: The remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, and the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
步骤714、远端设备与第二中继设备建立PC5连接。Step 714: The remote device establishes a PC5 connection with the second relay device.
步骤715、远端设备发送RRC连接重配完成消息给第一基站,用于通知第一基站切换完成。Step 715: The remote device sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the first base station, to notify the first base station that the handover is complete.
步骤716、第一基站发送切换完成消息给第一核心网设备,用于通知第一核心网设备切换完成。Step 716: The first base station sends a handover complete message to the first core network device, to notify the first core network device that the handover is complete.
通过上述描述,在应用场景四下,采用上述方法能够节省远端设备在中继设备间切换的信令消耗,并且远端设备通过一个间接路径切换到另一个间接路径,在切换过程中远端设备没有断开连接,保持通过间接路径连接基站,保证了远端设备业务连续性。Through the above description, in the application scenario 4, the above method can save the signaling consumption of the remote device switching between the relay devices, and the remote device switches to another indirect path through an indirect path, and the remote end is in the process of switching. The device is not disconnected, and the base station is connected through an indirect path to ensure the continuity of the remote device service.
应用场景五:第一中继设备的服务基站为第一基站,第二中继设备的服务基站为第二 基站,第一中继设备和第二中继设备的服务核心网设备均为第一核心网设备。具体的信令交互过程如图8所示。Application scenario 5: the serving base station of the first relay device is the first base station, and the serving base station of the second relay device is the second The base station, the first relay device, and the service core network device of the second relay device are all the first core network devices. The specific signaling interaction process is shown in Figure 8.
步骤801~步骤804与步骤701~步骤704相同,重复之处不再赘述。Steps 801 to 804 are the same as steps 701 to 704, and the details are not described again.
可选的,若第二中继设备处于空闲态,则执行步骤805~807;否则执行步骤808。Optionally, if the second relay device is in an idle state, perform steps 805-807; otherwise, perform step 808.
步骤805、第一核心网设备向第二基站发送初始上下文设置请求(Initial Context Setup Request)。Step 805: The first core network device sends an initial context setup request (Initial Context Setup Request) to the second base station.
Initial Context Setup Request中包含第二中继设备的上下文,例如:EPS承载标识(EPS bearer ID)、QoS、S-GW地址(S-GW address)。The Initial Context Setup Request includes the context of the second relay device, such as an EPS bearer ID, a QoS, and an S-GW address.
步骤806、第二基站建立第二中继设备的上下文,并建立和第二中继设备间的RB。Step 806: The second base station establishes a context of the second relay device, and establishes an RB with the second relay device.
步骤807、第二基站发送初始上下文设置完成(Initial Context Setup Complete)给第一核心网设备。Step 807: The second base station sends an initial context setup complete (Initial Context Setup Complete) to the first core network device.
步骤808、第一核心网设备向第二基站回复切换请求消息(Handover Request)。Step 808: The first core network device returns a handover request message (Handover Request) to the second base station.
Handover Request中包含第一基站为第二中继设备分配的用于S1接口的标识、第一基站为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识、和第一基站的标识。The Handover Request includes an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station for the second relay device, an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station for the remote device, and an identifier of the first base station.
步骤809、第二基站根据第一基站的标识向第一基站发送上下文请求消息。Step 809: The second base station sends a context request message to the first base station according to the identifier of the first base station.
该上下文请求消息中包括第一基站为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识,第二基站为远端设备分配的用于X2接口的标识。可选的该上下文请求消息中包含S1-AP ID Indication。需要说明的是,该上下文请求消息是发送在基站间的X2接口上,本应该使用第一基站为远端设备分配的用于X2接口的标识,但是此时第一基站还没有分配该标识,为了使第一基站可以识别出远端设备,所以在上下文请求消息中使用第一基站为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识。The context request message includes an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station for the remote device, and an identifier for the X2 interface allocated by the second base station to the remote device. Optionally, the context request message includes an S1-AP ID Indication. It should be noted that the context request message is sent on the X2 interface between the base stations, and the identifier used by the first base station for the remote device to be used for the X2 interface should be used, but the first base station has not allocated the identifier yet. In order for the first base station to identify the remote device, the identity assigned by the first base station to the remote device for the S1 interface is used in the context request message.
步骤810、第一基站向第二基站返回上下文响应消息。Step 810: The first base station returns a context response message to the second base station.
该上下文响应消息中包括第一基站为远端设备分配的用于X2接口的标识、第二基站为远端设备分配的用于X2接口的标识、远端设备的上下文信息。The context response message includes an identifier for the X2 interface allocated by the first base station for the remote device, an identifier for the X2 interface allocated by the second base station for the remote device, and context information of the remote device.
步骤811、第二基站根据远端设备的上下文信息,复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第一中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系。第二基站为远端设备分配新的L2 ID,建立远端设备的L2 ID对应的EPS bearer ID和第二中继设备的DRB ID的映射关系。Step 811: The second base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the context information of the remote device, where the first mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the first relay device. The second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay devices. The second base station allocates a new L2 ID to the remote device, and establishes a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device and the DRB ID of the second relay device.
步骤812、第二基站发送RRC连接重配消息给第二中继设备,第二中继设备返回RRC连接完成(RRC Connection Complete)消息。Step 812: The second base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second relay device, and the second relay device returns an RRC Connection Complete message.
RRC连接重配消息用于通知第二中继设备为远端设备中继的配置。The RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to notify the second relay device of the configuration for relaying the remote device.
RRC连接重配消息还可以包括远端设备的L2 ID,远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系,远端设备的L2 ID对应的EPS bearer ID和第二中继设备的DRB ID的映射关系。The RRC connection reconfiguration message may further include an L2 ID of the remote device, a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI of the second relay device, an EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device, and the second middle Following the mapping relationship of the DRB ID of the device.
步骤813、第二基站发送上下文响应确认消息(Context Response Ack)给第一基站。Step 813: The second base station sends a context response acknowledgement message (Context Response Ack) to the first base station.
上下文响应确认消息中包含目标到源容器(target to source container),该container中包含远端设备的L2 ID,远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系。The context response confirmation message includes a target to source container, where the container includes the L2 ID of the remote device, the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay device.
步骤814a、第一基站发送RRC连接重配消息给第一中继设备,用于通知第一中继设备 删除为远端设备中继的相关配置。Step 814a: The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first relay device, where the first relay device is notified. Delete the related configuration for the remote device relay.
步骤814b、第一基站发送RRC连接重配消息给远端设备,用于通知远端设备切换到第二中继设备。Step 814b: The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the remote device, to notify the remote device to switch to the second relay device.
第一基站在发送给远端设备的RRC连接重配消息中可以携带以下至少一种信息:指示信息、远端设备和第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的相关配置、远端设备的L2 ID、远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。其中,指示信息用于通知远端设备:该RRC连接重配消息用于实现中继设备间的切换。若远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系未发生变化,则第一基站在发送给远端设备的RRC连接重配消息中不携带此映射关系。The first base station may carry at least one of the following information in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device: the indication information, the related configuration of the side link bearer identifier between the remote device and the second relay device, and the remote device The mapping relationship between the L2 ID, the EPS bearer ID of the remote device, and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay devices. The indication information is used to notify the remote device that the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to implement handover between the relay devices. If the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device does not change, the first base station does not carry the mapping relationship in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device. .
步骤814a和步骤814b的执行顺序本申请不作限定,或者,步骤814a和步骤814b可以并行执行。The order of execution of steps 814a and 814b is not limited herein, or steps 814a and 814b may be performed in parallel.
步骤815、远端设备发送间接连接释放(Direct Link Release)消息给第一中继设备,用于断开与第一中继设备的PC5连接,第一中继设备向远端设备返回间接连接释放应答响应。Step 815: The remote device sends an indirect connection release (Direct Link Release) message to the first relay device, where the first relay device disconnects the PC5 connection with the first relay device, and the first relay device returns an indirect connection release to the remote device. Response response.
步骤816、远端设备复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为:远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标识与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。Step 816: The remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, and the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
步骤817、远端设备与第二中继设备建立PC5连接。Step 817: The remote device establishes a PC5 connection with the second relay device.
步骤818、远端设备发送RRC连接重配完成消息给第一基站,用于通知第一基站切换完成。Step 818: The remote device sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the first base station, to notify the first base station that the handover is complete.
步骤819、第一基站发送切换完成消息给第一核心网设备,用于通知第一核心网设备切换完成。Step 819: The first base station sends a handover complete message to the first core network device, to notify the first core network device that the handover is complete.
通过上述描述,在应用场景五下,第一中继设备与第二中继设备的服务基站不相同,因此第二基站向第一基站请求远端设备的上下文信息。采用上述方法能够节省远端设备在中继设备间切换的信令消耗,并且远端设备通过一个间接路径切换到另一个间接路径,在切换过程中远端设备没有断开连接,保持通过间接路径连接基站,保证了远端设备业务连续性。With the above description, in the application scenario 5, the first relay device is different from the serving base station of the second relay device, and therefore the second base station requests the first base station for the context information of the remote device. The above method can save the signaling consumption of the remote device switching between the relay devices, and the remote device switches to another indirect path through an indirect path, and the remote device does not disconnect during the switching process, and maintains the indirect path. The base station is connected to ensure the continuity of the service of the remote device.
应用场景六:第一中继设备的服务基站为第一基站,第二中继设备的服务基站为第二基站,第一中继设备的服务核心网设备均为第一核心网设备,第二中继设备的服务核心网设备均为第二核心网设备。具体的信令交互过程如图9所示。Application scenario 6: the serving base station of the first relay device is the first base station, the serving base station of the second relay device is the second base station, and the serving core network devices of the first relay device are all the first core network devices, and the second The service core network devices of the relay device are all second core network devices. The specific signaling interaction process is shown in Figure 9.
步骤901~步骤902与步骤701~步骤702相同,重复之处不再赘述。Steps 901 to 902 are the same as steps 701 to 702, and the details are not described again.
步骤903、第二中继设备向第二核心网设备发送第二请求消息,第二核心网设备接收第二中继设备发送的第二请求消息。Step 903: The second relay device sends a second request message to the second core network device, where the second core network device receives the second request message sent by the second relay device.
第二请求消息可以为服务请求(service request),该服务请求中包括从第一请求消息中获取的指示信息和远端设备的GUTI。指示信息用于指示该服务请求是为向远端设备提供中继服务而发起的。The second request message may be a service request, where the service request includes the indication information obtained from the first request message and the GUTI of the remote device. The indication information is used to indicate that the service request is initiated to provide a relay service to the remote device.
步骤904、第二核心网设备对远端设备能否通过第二中继设备接入网络进行鉴权和授权。Step 904: The second core network device authenticates and authorizes whether the remote device accesses the network through the second relay device.
具体地,第二核心网设备根据指示信息确定远端设备需要通过第二中继设备接入网络,则根据第二中继设备的GUTI确定第二中继设备的IMSI,根据远端设备的IMSI和第二 中继设备的IMSI,对远端设备能否通过第二中继设备接入网络进行鉴权和授权,如果鉴权和授权通过则执行后面的步骤。Specifically, the second core network device determines, according to the indication information, that the remote device needs to access the network through the second relay device, and determines the IMSI of the second relay device according to the GUTI of the second relay device, according to the IMSI of the remote device. And second The IMSI of the relay device authenticates and authorizes whether the remote device accesses the network through the second relay device. If the authentication and authorization are passed, the subsequent steps are performed.
可选的,若第二中继设备处于空闲态,则执行步骤905~907;否则执行步骤908。Optionally, if the second relay device is in an idle state, perform steps 905-907; otherwise, perform step 908.
步骤905、第二核心网设备向第二基站发送初始上下文设置请求(Initial Context Setup Request)。Step 905: The second core network device sends an Initial Context Setup Request to the second base station.
其中,Initial Context Setup Request中包含第二中继设备的上下文,例如:EPS承载标识(EPS bearer ID)、QoS、S-GW地址(S-GW address)。The Initial Context Setup Request includes the context of the second relay device, such as an EPS bearer ID (EPS bearer ID), a QoS, and an S-GW address (S-GW address).
步骤906、第二基站建立第二中继设备的上下文,并建立和第二中继设备间的RB。Step 906: The second base station establishes a context of the second relay device, and establishes an RB with the second relay device.
步骤907、第二基站发送初始上下文设置完成(Initial Context Setup Complete)给第二核心网设备。Step 907: The second base station sends an initial context setup complete (Initial Context Setup Complete) to the second core network device.
步骤908、第二核心网设备向第一核心网设备发送重定向请求(Relocation Required)。Step 908: The second core network device sends a Relocation Required to the first core network device.
Relocation Required中包含远端设备的GUTI或IMSI。Relocation Required contains the GUTI or IMSI of the remote device.
步骤909、第一核心网设备向第一基站发送切换请求(Handover Request)。Step 909: The first core network device sends a handover request (Handover Request) to the first base station.
Handover Request中包含第一基站为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识、第一核心网设备为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识。The Handover Request includes an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first base station for the remote device, and an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the first core network device to the remote device.
需要说明的是,若远端设备在第一核心网设备和第一基站内都有上下文,则第一核心网设备和第一基站间的S1信令中都会携带第一基站为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识、第一核心网设备为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识It should be noted that, if the remote device has a context in the first core network device and the first base station, the S1 signaling between the first core network device and the first base station carries the first base station to allocate the remote device. The identifier for the S1 interface, and the identifier for the S1 interface assigned by the first core network device to the remote device
步骤910、第一基站向第一核心网设备回复切换响应(HO Response)。Step 910: The first base station returns a handover response (HO Response) to the first core network device.
HO Response中包含以下至少一种信息:源到目标容器(Source to target container)、第一基站为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识、第一核心网设备为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识。The HO Response includes at least one of the following information: a source to target container, an identifier allocated by the first base station for the remote device for the S1 interface, and a first core network device allocated for the remote device. ID of the S1 interface.
步骤911、第一核心网设备向第二核心网设备发送重定向响应(Relocaiton Response)。Step 911: The first core network device sends a Relocaiton Response to the second core network device.
Relocaiton Response中包含远端设备在第一核心网设备的上下文信息,Source to target container,远端设备的IMSI。The Relocaiton Response includes context information of the remote device on the first core network device, Source to target container, and IMSI of the remote device.
步骤912、第二核心网设备向第二基站发送切换请求(Handover Request)。Step 912: The second core network device sends a handover request (Handover Request) to the second base station.
Handover Request中包括第二基站为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识,第二核心网设备为远端设备分配的用于S1接口的标识,Source to target container,第二基站为第二中继设备分配的用于S1接口的标识。The Handover Request includes an identifier for the S1 interface allocated by the second base station to the remote device, and the identifier of the S1 interface allocated by the second core network device to the remote device, Source to target container, and the second base station is the second medium. The identifier assigned to the S1 interface following the device assignment.
步骤913、第二基站复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系。、Step 913: The second base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship. ,
第一映射关系为远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第一中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系。第二基站为远端设备分配新的L2 ID,建立远端设备的L2 ID对应的EPS bearer ID和第二中继设备的DRB ID的映射关系。The first mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the first relay device, and the second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI between the second relay device. The second base station allocates a new L2 ID to the remote device, and establishes a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device and the DRB ID of the second relay device.
步骤914、第二基站发送RRC连接重配消息给第二中继设备,第二中继设备返回RRC连接完成(RRC Connection Complete)消息。Step 914: The second base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the second relay device, and the second relay device returns an RRC Connection Complete message.
RRC连接重配消息用于通知第二中继设备为远端设备中继的配置。The RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to notify the second relay device of the configuration for relaying the remote device.
RRC连接重配消息还可以包括远端设备的L2 ID,远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系,远端设备的L2 ID对应的EPS bearer ID和第二中继设备的DRB ID的映射关系。 The RRC connection reconfiguration message may further include an L2 ID of the remote device, a mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the SLBI of the second relay device, an EPS bearer ID corresponding to the L2 ID of the remote device, and the second middle Following the mapping relationship of the DRB ID of the device.
步骤915、第二基站发送切换响应(HO response)给第二核心网设备。Step 915: The second base station sends a handover response (HO response) to the second core network device.
HO response中包含目标到源容器(target to source container),该container中包含远端设备的L2 ID、远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的SLBI的映射关系The HO response includes a target to source container, where the container includes the L2 ID of the remote device, the EPS bearer ID of the remote device, and the SLBI mapping relationship between the second relay device.
步骤916、第二核心网设备给第一核心网设备发送重定向响应确认(Relocation Response Ack)消息,其中包含target to source container、远端设备的IMSI。Step 916: The second core network device sends a Relocation Response Ack message to the first core network device, where the target to source container and the IMSI of the remote device are included.
步骤917、第一核心网设备给第一基站发送切换响应确认(HO Response Ack)消息,其中包含target to source container。Step 917: The first core network device sends a HO Response Ack message to the first base station, where the target to source container is included.
步骤918a、第一基站发送RRC连接重配消息给第一中继设备,用于通知第一中继设备删除为远端设备中继的相关配置。Step 918a: The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the first relay device, to notify the first relay device to delete the related configuration that is relayed to the remote device.
步骤918b、第一基站发送RRC连接重配消息给远端设备,用于通知远端设备切换到第二中继设备。Step 918b: The first base station sends an RRC connection reconfiguration message to the remote device, to notify the remote device to switch to the second relay device.
第一基站在发送给远端设备的RRC连接重配消息中可以携带以下至少一种信息:指示信息、远端设备和第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的相关配置、远端设备的L2 ID、远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。其中,指示信息用于通知远端设备:该RRC连接重配消息用于实现中继设备间的切换。若远端设备的EPS bearer ID与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系未发生变化,则第一基站在发送给远端设备的RRC连接重配消息中不携带此映射关系。The first base station may carry at least one of the following information in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device: the indication information, the related configuration of the side link bearer identifier between the remote device and the second relay device, and the remote device The mapping relationship between the L2 ID, the EPS bearer ID of the remote device, and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay devices. The indication information is used to notify the remote device that the RRC connection reconfiguration message is used to implement handover between the relay devices. If the mapping relationship between the EPS bearer ID of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device does not change, the first base station does not carry the mapping relationship in the RRC connection reconfiguration message sent to the remote device. .
步骤918a和步骤918b的执行顺序本申请不作限定,或者,步骤918a和步骤918b可以并行执行。The order of execution of step 918a and step 918b is not limited herein, or steps 918a and 918b may be performed in parallel.
步骤919、远端设备发送间接连接释放(Direct Link Release)消息给第一中继设备,用于断开与第一中继设备的PC5连接,第一中继设备向远端设备返回间接连接释放应答响应。Step 919: The remote device sends an indirect connection release (Direct Link Release) message to the first relay device, where the first relay device disconnects the PC5 connection with the first relay device, and the first relay device returns an indirect connection release to the remote device. Response response.
步骤920、远端设备复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为:远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标识与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。Step 920: The remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, and the second mapping The relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
步骤921、远端设备与第二中继设备建立PC5连接。Step 921: The remote device establishes a PC5 connection with the second relay device.
步骤922、远端设备发送RRC连接重配完成消息给第二基站,用于通知第二基站切换完成。Step 922: The remote device sends an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the second base station, to notify the second base station that the handover is complete.
步骤923、第一基站发送切换完成消息给第二核心网设备,用于通知第二核心网设备切换完成。Step 923: The first base station sends a handover complete message to the second core network device, to notify the second core network device that the handover is complete.
通过上述描述,在应用场景六下第一中继设备与第二中继设备的服务基站和服务核心网设备都不同,因此远端设备的上下文需要从第二核心网设备经过第一核心网设备、第一基站、第一核心网设备、第二核心网设备传递到第二基站。采用上述方法能够节省远端设备在中继设备间切换的信令消耗,并且远端设备通过一个间接路径切换到另一个间接路径,在切换过程中远端设备没有断开连接,保持通过间接路径连接基站,保证了远端设备业务连续性。Through the foregoing description, in the application scenario 6, the first relay device is different from the serving base station and the serving core network device of the second relay device, and therefore the context of the remote device needs to pass through the first core network device from the second core network device. The first base station, the first core network device, and the second core network device are delivered to the second base station. The above method can save the signaling consumption of the remote device switching between the relay devices, and the remote device switches to another indirect path through an indirect path, and the remote device does not disconnect during the switching process, and maintains the indirect path. The base station is connected to ensure the continuity of the service of the remote device.
综上所述,本申请实施例中,通过采用图2或图6所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法,能够节省远端设备在中继设备间切换的信令消耗,并且远端设备通过一个间接路径切换到另一个间接路径,在切换过程中远端设备没有断开连接,保持通过间接路径连接基站,保证了远端设备业务连续性。另外,现有技术中,若远端设备欲连接的中继设备处 于空闲态,则中继设备收到远端设备发送的连接建立请求时,中继设备发送service request给核心网设备从而进入连接态;或者,中继设备的下行数据到达时,核心网设备通过寻呼中继设备使其进入连接态。现有技术中,中继设备注册网络时,核心网设备会分配给中继设备跟踪区列表(Tracking Area List,TAL),该跟踪区列表中包含若干个基站,核心网设备需要在TAL中包含的所有基站下寻呼中继设备,会消耗大量网络资源,造成资源浪费。本申请实施例通过核心网设备向指定基站下的特定小区寻呼第二中继设备,节省了寻呼第二中继设备的网络资源。In summary, in the embodiment of the present application, by using the method of switching between the relay devices by using the remote device shown in FIG. 2 or FIG. 6, the signaling consumption of the remote device switching between the relay devices can be saved, and The remote device switches to another indirect path through an indirect path. During the switching process, the remote device does not disconnect, and the indirect path is connected to the base station to ensure the continuity of the remote device service. In addition, in the prior art, if the remote device wants to connect to the relay device, In the idle state, when the relay device receives the connection establishment request sent by the remote device, the relay device sends a service request to the core network device to enter the connection state; or, when the downlink data of the relay device arrives, the core network device passes Paging the relay device into the connected state. In the prior art, when the relay device registers the network, the core network device allocates a Tracking Area List (TAL) to the relay device. The tracking area list includes several base stations, and the core network device needs to be included in the TAL. The paging relay device under all the base stations consumes a large amount of network resources, resulting in waste of resources. The embodiment of the present application saves the network resource of paging the second relay device by paging the second relay device to the specific cell under the designated base station by using the core network device.
基于与图2所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法的同一发明构思,如图10所示,本申请实施例还提供了一种切换装置1000,该切换装置1000应用于远端设备,用于执行图2所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法中远端设备执行的步骤,该切换装置1000包括通信单元1001和处理单元1002,其中:Based on the same inventive concept of the method for switching between the remote device and the relay device shown in FIG. 2, as shown in FIG. 10, the embodiment of the present application further provides a switching device 1000, which is applied to the remote end. The device is configured to perform the steps performed by the remote device in the method for switching the remote device between the relay devices shown in FIG. 2, the switching device 1000 includes a communication unit 1001 and a processing unit 1002, where:
通信单元1001,用于通过第一中继设备连接网络;The communication unit 1001 is configured to connect to the network by using the first relay device.
处理单元1002,用于获取第二中继设备的第一标识;The processing unit 1002 is configured to acquire a first identifier of the second relay device.
通信单元1001,还用于通过第一中继设备向基站发送请求消息;The communication unit 1001 is further configured to send a request message to the base station by using the first relay device;
其中,请求消息中包括第一标识和指示信息,指示信息用于表征远端设备在中继设备间切换;请求消息用于请求基站将远端设备由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到由第二中继设备连接网络;The request message includes a first identifier and indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the remote device switches between the relay devices, and the request message is used to request the base station to switch the remote device from being connected to the network through the first relay device. The second relay device is connected to the network;
通信单元1001,还用于接收基站返回的针对请求消息的响应消息;The communication unit 1001 is further configured to receive a response message for the request message returned by the base station;
处理单元1002,还用于基于响应消息,建立与第二中继设备的连接。The processing unit 1002 is further configured to establish a connection with the second relay device based on the response message.
可选的,请求消息中还包括第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识;第二标识用于基站确定第二中继设备的服务基站是否为基站。Optionally, the request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell, where the second identifier is used by the base station to determine whether the serving base station of the second relay device is a base station.
可选的,第二标识还用于:当第二中继设备处于空闲态时,第二中继设备所属的核心网设备在第二中继设备驻留小区内进行寻呼。Optionally, the second identifier is further configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the core network device to which the second relay device belongs is paged in the second relay device camping cell.
可选的,通信单元1001,还用于接收基站发送的响应消息,响应消息中包括指示信息;Optionally, the communication unit 1001 is further configured to receive a response message sent by the base station, where the response message includes indication information;
处理单元1002,还用于根据指示信息,复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为装置的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为装置的承载标载与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。The processing unit 1002 is further configured to: multiplex the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the indication information, where the first mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the device and the side link bearer identifier between the first relay device, where The second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer label of the device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device.
基于与图2所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法的同一发明构思,如图11所示,本申请实施例还提供了一种切换装置1100,该切换装置1100应用于第一基站,用于执行图2所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法中第一基站执行的步骤,该切换装置1100包括通信单元1101和处理单元1102,其中:Based on the same inventive concept of the method for switching between the remote device and the relay device shown in FIG. 2, as shown in FIG. 11, the embodiment of the present application further provides a switching device 1100, which is applied to the first device. The base station is configured to perform the steps performed by the first base station in the method for switching the remote device between the relay devices shown in FIG. 2, the switching device 1100 includes a communication unit 1101 and a processing unit 1102, where:
通信单元1101,用于接收远端设备通过第一中继设备发送的第一请求消息,其中,第一请求消息包括第二中继设备的第一标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;The communication unit 1101 is configured to receive a first request message sent by the remote device by using the first relay device, where the first request message includes a first identifier of the second relay device and is used to identify the switch between the relay devices. Indication information;
处理单元1102,用于根据第一请求消息,将远端设备由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到由第二中继设备连接网络。The processing unit 1102 is configured to switch, according to the first request message, the remote device from the first relay device connection network to the second relay device to connect to the network.
可选的,第一请求消息中还包括:第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识;第二标识用于处理单元确定第二中继设备的服务基站是否为装置。Optionally, the first request message further includes: a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell; the second identifier is used by the processing unit to determine whether the serving base station of the second relay device is a device.
可选的,第二标识还用于,当第二中继设备处于空闲态时,第二中继设备所属的核心网设备在第二中继设备驻留小区内进行寻呼。Optionally, the second identifier is further configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the core network device to which the second relay device belongs is paged in the second relay device camping cell.
可选的,处理单元1102具体用于: Optionally, the processing unit 1102 is specifically configured to:
向第一核心网设备发送第二请求消息,第二请求消息中包括:从第一请求消息中收到的第二中继设备的第一标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;指示信息用于指示第一核心网设备:远端设备将由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到由第二中继设备连接网络;Sending a second request message to the first core network device, where the second request message includes: a first identifier of the second relay device received from the first request message, and an indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices The indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device will be switched by connecting the network through the first relay device to the network connected by the second relay device;
或者,向第一核心网设备发送第二请求消息,由第一核心网设备向第二核心网设备发送第三请求消息,第三请求消息中包括:从第二请求消息中收到的第二中继设备的第一标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;指示信息指示第二核心网设备:远端设备将由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到由第二中继设备连接网络。Or sending a second request message to the first core network device, where the first core network device sends a third request message to the second core network device, where the third request message includes: receiving the second request message from the second request message. a first identifier of the relay device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the indication information indicates a second core network device: the remote device is to be switched by the first relay device to the second relay device Connect Network.
可选的,第一请求消息中还包括第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识;Optionally, the first request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell;
若处理单元1102根据第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识确定第二中继设备的服务基站为第一基站,则处理单元1102具体用于:If the processing unit 1102 determines that the serving base station of the second relay device is the first base station according to the second identifier of the second relay device camping cell, the processing unit 1102 is specifically configured to:
复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为:远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标识与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系;And multiplexing the first mapping relationship with the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is the remote device a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device;
或者,若处理单元1102根据第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识确定第二中继设备的服务基站不是第一基站,则第二请求消息中还包含第一映射关系,用于第二基站复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系。Or, if the processing unit 1102 determines that the serving base station of the second relay device is not the first base station according to the second identifier of the second relay device camping cell, the second request message further includes a first mapping relationship, where The base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship.
基于与图6所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法的同一发明构思,如图12所示,本申请实施例还提供了一种切换装置1200,该切换装置1200应用于远端设备,用于执行图6所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法中远端设备执行的步骤,该切换装置1200包括通信单元1201和处理单元1202,其中:Based on the same inventive concept of the method for switching between the remote device and the relay device shown in FIG. 6, as shown in FIG. 12, the embodiment of the present application further provides a switching device 1200, which is applied to the remote end. The device is configured to perform the steps performed by the remote device in the method for switching the remote device between the relay devices shown in FIG. 6. The switching device 1200 includes a communication unit 1201 and a processing unit 1202, where:
通信单元1201,用于通过第一中继设备连接网络,以及向第二中继设备发送请求消息;The communication unit 1201 is configured to connect to the network by using the first relay device, and send a request message to the second relay device.
其中,请求消息中包括:远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;请求消息用于请求第二中继设备向网络发起请求,以将远端设备由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到由第二中继设备连接网络;The request message includes: an identifier of the remote device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the request message is used to request the second relay device to initiate a request to the network, to pass the remote device by the first The relay device connects to the network to switch to the network connected by the second relay device;
通信单元1201,还用于接收基站发送的响应消息;The communication unit 1201 is further configured to receive a response message sent by the base station;
处理单元1202,用于基于响应消息,建立与第二中继设备的连接。The processing unit 1202 is configured to establish a connection with the second relay device based on the response message.
可选的,响应消息中包括用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;Optionally, the response message includes indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices;
处理单元1202,还用于在通信单元1201接收基站发送的响应消息之后,根据响应消息,复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为:远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标载与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。The processing unit 1202 is further configured to: after the communication unit 1201 receives the response message sent by the base station, multiplex the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the response message, where the first mapping relationship is: the bearer identifier of the remote device and the first The mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the side link and the bearer identifier of the second link device is the mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device.
基于与图6所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法的同一发明构思,如图13所示,本申请实施例还提供了一种切换装置1300,该切换装置1300应用于第二中继设备,用于执行图6所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法中第二中继设备执行的步骤,该切换装置1300包括通信单元1301和处理单元1302,其中:Based on the same inventive concept of the method for switching between the remote device and the relay device shown in FIG. 6 , as shown in FIG. 13 , the embodiment of the present application further provides a switching device 1300 , where the switching device 1300 is applied to the second device. a relay device, configured to perform the steps performed by the second relay device in the method for switching the remote device between the relay devices shown in FIG. 6, the switching device 1300 includes a communication unit 1301 and a processing unit 1302, where:
远端设备通过第一中继设备连接网络,通信单元1301,用于接收远端设备发送的第一请求消息,第一请求消息中包括:远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;The remote device is connected to the network by using the first relay device, and the communication unit 1301 is configured to receive the first request message sent by the remote device, where the first request message includes: an identifier of the remote device and is used to identify the device between the relay devices. Instructions for switching;
处理单元1302,用于根据第一请求消息,向网络发起请求,以将远端设备由通过第一 中继设备连接网络切换到由第二中继设备连接网络。The processing unit 1302 is configured to initiate a request to the network according to the first request message, to pass the remote device by using the first The relay device connects to the network to switch to the network connected by the second relay device.
可选的,处理单元1302具体用于:Optionally, the processing unit 1302 is specifically configured to:
若服务第一中继设备的核心网设备为第一核心网设备,服务第二中继设备的核心网设备为第二核心网设备,则通信单元1301还用于向第二核心网设备发送第二请求消息,第二请求消息中包括:从第一请求消息中收到的远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;第二请求消息用于第二核心网设备向第一核心网设备发送第三请求消息,第三请求消息中包括:从第二请求消息中收到的远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,指示信息用于指示第一核心网设备:远端设备将由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到由第二中继设备连接网络;或者,If the core network device serving the first relay device is the first core network device, and the core network device serving the second relay device is the second core network device, the communication unit 1301 is further configured to send the second core network device to the second core network device. The second request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the first request message and indication information for identifying handover between the relay devices; and the second request message is used by the second core network device Sending a third request message to the first core network device, where the third request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the second request message, and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the indication information is used Instructing the first core network device: the remote device will be switched to be connected to the network by the second relay device by connecting the network through the first relay device; or
若服务第一中继设备和服务第二中继设备的核心网设备均为第一核心网设备,则通信单元1301还用于向第一核心网设备发送第二请求消息,第二请求消息中包括:从第一请求消息中收到的远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,指示信息用于指示第一核心网设备:远端设备将由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到由第二中继设备连接网络。If the first network device that serves the first relay device and the second relay device is the first core network device, the communication unit 1301 is further configured to send a second request message to the first core network device, where the second request message is used. The method includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the first request message, and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device is to be passed by the first relay The device connection network switches to the network connected by the second relay device.
基于与图6所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法的同一发明构思,如图14所示,本申请实施例还提供了一种切换装置1400,该切换装置1400应用于第二核心网设备,用于执行图6所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法中第二核心网设备执行的步骤,该切换装置1400包括接收单元1401和发送单元1402,其中:Based on the same inventive concept of the method for switching between the remote device and the relay device shown in FIG. 6 , as shown in FIG. 14 , the embodiment of the present application further provides a switching device 1400, where the switching device 1400 is applied to the second device. The core network device is configured to perform the steps performed by the second core network device in the method for switching the remote device between the relay devices shown in FIG. 6. The switching device 1400 includes a receiving unit 1401 and a sending unit 1402, where:
远端设备通过第一中继设备连接网络,若服务第一中继设备的核心网设备为第一核心网设备,服务第二中继设备的核心网设备为第二核心网设备,则:The remote device connects to the network through the first relay device. If the core network device serving the first relay device is the first core network device and the core network device serving the second relay device is the second core network device, then:
接收单元1401,用于接收第二中继设备在收到第一请求消息后发送的第二请求消息,第二请求消息中包括远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;The receiving unit 1401 is configured to receive a second request message that is sent by the second relay device after receiving the first request message, where the second request message includes an identifier of the remote device and an indication for identifying switching between the relay devices. information;
发送单元1402,用于向第一核心网设备发送第三请求消息,第三请求消息中包括:从第二请求消息中收到的远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,指示信息用于指示第一核心网设备:远端设备将由通过第一中继设备连接网络切换到由第二中继设备连接网络;The sending unit 1402 is configured to send a third request message to the first core network device, where the third request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the second request message and used to identify the switch between the relay devices. Instructing information, the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device will be switched to be connected to the network by the second relay device by connecting the network through the first relay device;
若服务第一中继设备和服务第二中继设备的核心网设备均为第一核心网设备,则:If the first network device that serves the first relay device and the second relay device serves the first core network device, then:
接收单元1401,用于接收第二中继设备在收到第一请求消息后发送的第二请求消息,第二请求消息中包括远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;The receiving unit 1401 is configured to receive a second request message that is sent by the second relay device after receiving the first request message, where the second request message includes an identifier of the remote device and an indication for identifying switching between the relay devices. information;
发送单元1402,用于向第二中继设备的服务基站发送第四请求消息,第四请求消息用于指示第二中继设备的服务基站:获取第一映射关系,复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,第一映射关系为:远端设备的承载标识与第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,第二映射关系为远端设备的承载标载与第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。The sending unit 1402 is configured to send a fourth request message to the serving base station of the second relay device, where the fourth request message is used to indicate the serving base station of the second relay device: acquiring the first mapping relationship, and multiplexing the first mapping relationship to The second mapping relationship is: a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is the bearer label of the remote device and the second The mapping relationship between the side links carrying the identifiers between the devices.
可选的,接收单元1401还用于:向第一核心网设备发送第三请求消息之后,接收第一核心网设备返回的响应消息;Optionally, the receiving unit 1401 is further configured to: after sending the third request message to the first core network device, receive the response message returned by the first core network device;
发送单元1402,还用于向第二中继设备的服务基站发送第五请求消息,第五请求消息中包括第二中继设备的标识,第二中继设备的标识用于指示服务基站:远端设备将切换到由第二中继设备连接网络。The sending unit 1402 is further configured to send a fifth request message to the serving base station of the second relay device, where the fifth request message includes an identifier of the second relay device, and the identifier of the second relay device is used to indicate the serving base station: The end device will switch to the network connected by the second relay device.
相应地,基于与图2所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法的同一发明构思,如图15所示,本申请实施例还提供了一种远端设备1500,该远端设备1500包括收发器1501 和处理器1502,处理器1502用于执行一组程序,当该程序执行时,使得该远端设备1500可以执行图2所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法中远端设备执行的步骤。具体步骤在此不再赘述。Correspondingly, based on the same inventive concept of the method for switching between the remote device and the relay device shown in FIG. 2, as shown in FIG. 15, the embodiment of the present application further provides a remote device 1500, the remote device 1500 includes transceiver 1501 And a processor 1502, the processor 1502 is configured to execute a set of programs, when the program is executed, the remote device 1500 can perform the remote device execution in the method of switching between the remote devices shown in FIG. A step of. The specific steps are not described here.
可选的,该远端设备1500中还包括存储器1503,用于存储处理器1502执行的程序。Optionally, the remote device 1500 further includes a memory 1503 for storing a program executed by the processor 1502.
处理器1502可以是中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),网络处理器(network processor,NP)或者CPU和NP的组合。The processor 1502 may be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), or a combination of a CPU and an NP.
处理器1502还可以进一步包括硬件芯片。上述硬件芯片可以是专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)或其组合。上述PLD可以是复杂可编程逻辑器件(complex programmable logic device,CPLD),现场可编程逻辑门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA),通用阵列逻辑(generic array logic,GAL)或其任意组合。The processor 1502 may further include a hardware chip. The hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a combination thereof. The PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a general array logic (GAL), or any combination thereof.
存储器1503可以包括易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM);存储器1503也可以包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory),例如快闪存储器(flash memory),硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD);存储器1503还可以包括上述种类的存储器的组合。The memory 1503 may include a volatile memory such as a random-access memory (RAM); the memory 1503 may also include a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory (flash) Memory), hard disk drive (HDD) or solid-state drive (SSD); the memory 1503 may also include a combination of the above types of memory.
基于与图2所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法的同一发明构思,如图16所示,本申请实施例还提供了一种基站1600,基站1600包括收发器1601和处理器1602,处理器1602用于执行一组程序,当该程序执行时,使得该基站1600可以执行图2所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法中第一基站执行的步骤。具体步骤在此不再赘述。Based on the same inventive concept of the method for switching between the remote device and the relay device shown in FIG. 2, as shown in FIG. 16, the embodiment of the present application further provides a base station 1600, where the base station 1600 includes a transceiver 1601 and a processor. 1602. The processor 1602 is configured to execute a set of programs. When the program is executed, the base station 1600 can perform the steps performed by the first base station in the method for the remote device to switch between the relay devices shown in FIG. 2. The specific steps are not described here.
可选的,该基站1600中还包括存储器1603,用于存储处理器1602执行的程序。Optionally, the base station 1600 further includes a memory 1603 for storing a program executed by the processor 1602.
处理器1602可以是中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),网络处理器(network processor,NP)或者CPU和NP的组合。The processor 1602 can be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), or a combination of a CPU and an NP.
处理器1602还可以进一步包括硬件芯片。上述硬件芯片可以是专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)或其组合。上述PLD可以是复杂可编程逻辑器件(complex programmable logic device,CPLD),现场可编程逻辑门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA),通用阵列逻辑(generic array logic,GAL)或其任意组合。The processor 1602 can also further include a hardware chip. The hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a combination thereof. The PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a general array logic (GAL), or any combination thereof.
存储器1603可以包括易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM);存储器1603也可以包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory),例如快闪存储器(flash memory),硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD);存储器1603还可以包括上述种类的存储器的组合。The memory 1603 may include a volatile memory such as a random-access memory (RAM); the memory 1603 may also include a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory (flash) Memory), hard disk drive (HDD) or solid-state drive (SSD); the memory 1603 may also include a combination of the above types of memory.
基于与图6所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法的同一发明构思,如图17所示,本申请实施例还提供了一种远端设备1700,远端设备1700包括收发器1701和处理器1702,处理器1702用于执行一组程序,当该程序执行时,使得该远端设备1700可以执行图6所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法中执行远端设备的步骤。具体步骤在此不再赘述。Based on the same inventive concept of the method for switching between the remote device and the relay device shown in FIG. 6, as shown in FIG. 17, the embodiment of the present application further provides a remote device 1700, where the remote device 1700 includes a transceiver. 1701 and a processor 1702, the processor 1702 is configured to execute a set of programs, when the program is executed, to enable the remote device 1700 to perform the remote device in the method of switching between the relay devices shown in FIG. The steps of the device. The specific steps are not described here.
可选的,该远端设备1700中还包括存储器1703,用于存储处理器1702执行的程序。Optionally, the remote device 1700 further includes a memory 1703 for storing a program executed by the processor 1702.
处理器1702可以是中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),网络处理器(network processor,NP)或者CPU和NP的组合。The processor 1702 may be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), or a combination of a CPU and an NP.
处理器1702还可以进一步包括硬件芯片。上述硬件芯片可以是专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),可编程逻辑器件(programmable  logic device,PLD)或其组合。上述PLD可以是复杂可编程逻辑器件(complex programmable logic device,CPLD),现场可编程逻辑门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA),通用阵列逻辑(generic array logic,GAL)或其任意组合。The processor 1702 may further include a hardware chip. The above hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), programmable logic device (programmable) Logic device, PLD) or a combination thereof. The PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a general array logic (GAL), or any combination thereof.
存储器1703可以包括易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM);存储器1703也可以包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory),例如快闪存储器(flash memory),硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD);存储器1703还可以包括上述种类的存储器的组合。The memory 1703 may include a volatile memory such as a random-access memory (RAM); the memory 1703 may also include a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory (flash) Memory), hard disk drive (HDD) or solid state drive (SSD); the memory 1703 may also include a combination of the above types of memory.
基于与图6所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法的同一发明构思,如图18所示,本申请实施例还提供了一种中继设备1800,中继设备1800包括收发器1801和处理器1802,处理器1802用于执行一组程序,当该程序执行时,使得该中继设备1800可以执行图6所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法中第二中继设备执行的步骤。具体步骤在此不再赘述。Based on the same inventive concept of the method for switching between the remote device and the relay device shown in FIG. 6, as shown in FIG. 18, the embodiment of the present application further provides a relay device 1800, where the relay device 1800 includes a transceiver. 1801 and a processor 1802. The processor 1802 is configured to execute a set of programs. When the program is executed, the relay device 1800 can perform the second method in which the remote device switches between the relay devices shown in FIG. Following the steps performed by the device. The specific steps are not described here.
可选的,该中继设备1800中还包括存储器1803,用于存储处理器1802执行的程序。Optionally, the relay device 1800 further includes a memory 1803 for storing a program executed by the processor 1802.
处理器1802可以是中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),网络处理器(network processor,NP)或者CPU和NP的组合。The processor 1802 can be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), or a combination of a CPU and an NP.
处理器1802还可以进一步包括硬件芯片。上述硬件芯片可以是专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)或其组合。上述PLD可以是复杂可编程逻辑器件(complex programmable logic device,CPLD),现场可编程逻辑门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA),通用阵列逻辑(generic array logic,GAL)或其任意组合。The processor 1802 may further include a hardware chip. The hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a combination thereof. The PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a general array logic (GAL), or any combination thereof.
存储器1803可以包括易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM);存储器1803也可以包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory),例如快闪存储器(flash memory),硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD);存储器1803还可以包括上述种类的存储器的组合。The memory 1803 may include a volatile memory such as a random-access memory (RAM); the memory 1803 may also include a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory (flash) Memory), hard disk drive (HDD) or solid-state drive (SSD); the memory 1803 may also include a combination of the above types of memories.
基于与图6所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法的同一发明构思,如图19所示,本申请实施例还提供了一种核心网设备1900,核心网设备1900包括收发器1901和处理器1902,处理器1902用于执行一组程序,当该程序执行时,使得该核心网设备1900可以执行图6所示的远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法中第二核心网设备执行的步骤。具体步骤在此不再赘述。Based on the same inventive concept of the method for switching between the remote device and the relay device shown in FIG. 6, as shown in FIG. 19, the embodiment of the present application further provides a core network device 1900, where the core network device 1900 includes a transceiver. 1901 and processor 1902, the processor 1902 is configured to execute a set of programs, when the program is executed, the core network device 1900 can perform the second core in the method for switching the remote device between the relay devices shown in FIG. The steps performed by the network device. The specific steps are not described here.
可选的,该核心网设备1900中还包括存储器1903,用于存储处理器1902执行的程序。Optionally, the core network device 1900 further includes a memory 1903 for storing a program executed by the processor 1902.
处理器1902可以是中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),网络处理器(network processor,NP)或者CPU和NP的组合。The processor 1902 may be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), or a combination of a CPU and an NP.
处理器1902还可以进一步包括硬件芯片。上述硬件芯片可以是专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)或其组合。上述PLD可以是复杂可编程逻辑器件(complex programmable logic device,CPLD),现场可编程逻辑门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA),通用阵列逻辑(generic array logic,GAL)或其任意组合。The processor 1902 may further include a hardware chip. The hardware chip may be an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a programmable logic device (PLD), or a combination thereof. The PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a general array logic (GAL), or any combination thereof.
存储器1903可以包括易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM);存储器1903也可以包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory),例如快闪存储器(flash memory),硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘 (solid-state drive,SSD);存储器1903还可以包括上述种类的存储器的组合。The memory 1903 may include a volatile memory such as a random-access memory (RAM); the memory 1903 may also include a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory (flash) Memory), hard disk drive (HDD) or solid state drive (solid-state drive, SSD); the memory 1903 may also include a combination of the above types of memories.
本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质,用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序包括用于执行图2或图6所示的方法。The embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium for storing a computer program, the computer program comprising a method for performing the method shown in FIG. 2 or FIG.
本申请实施例提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行图2或图6所示的方法。Embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product comprising instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method illustrated in FIG. 2 or FIG.
本领域内的技术人员应明白,本申请的实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此,本申请可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且,本申请可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器、CD-ROM、光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that embodiments of the present application can be provided as a method, system, or computer program product. Thus, the present application can take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment in combination of software and hardware. Moreover, the application can take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) including computer usable program code.
本申请是参照根据本申请实施例的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机程序指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器,使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。The present application is described with reference to flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (system), and computer program products according to embodiments of the present application. It will be understood that each flow and/or block of the flowchart illustrations and/or FIG. These computer program instructions can be provided to a processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor, or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine for the execution of instructions for execution by a processor of a computer or other programmable data processing device. Means for implementing the functions specified in one or more of the flow or in a block or blocks of the flow chart.
这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中,使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品,该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。The computer program instructions can also be stored in a computer readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing device to operate in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer readable memory produce an article of manufacture comprising the instruction device. The apparatus implements the functions specified in one or more blocks of a flow or a flow and/or block diagram of the flowchart.
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上,使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理,从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。These computer program instructions can also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device such that a series of operational steps are performed on a computer or other programmable device to produce computer-implemented processing for execution on a computer or other programmable device. The instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in one or more of the flow or in a block or blocks of a flow diagram.
尽管已描述了本申请的优选实施例,但本领域内的技术人员一旦得知了基本创造性概念,则可对这些实施例作出另外的变更和修改。所以,所附权利要求意欲解释为包括优选实施例以及落入本申请范围的所有变更和修改。While the preferred embodiment of the present application has been described, it will be apparent that those skilled in the art can make further changes and modifications to the embodiments. Therefore, the appended claims are intended to be interpreted as including the preferred embodiments and the modifications and
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请实施例进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请实施例的精神和范围。这样,倘若本申请实施例的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。 It is apparent that those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the embodiments of the present application without departing from the spirit and scope of the embodiments of the present application. Thus, it is intended that the present invention cover the modifications and variations of the embodiments of the present invention.

Claims (30)

  1. 一种远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for switching a remote device between relay devices, comprising:
    远端设备通过第一中继设备连接网络;The remote device connects to the network through the first relay device;
    所述远端设备获取第二中继设备的第一标识;The remote device acquires a first identifier of the second relay device;
    所述远端设备通过所述第一中继设备向基站发送请求消息;Sending, by the first relay device, the request message to the base station by using the first relay device;
    其中,所述请求消息中包括所述第一标识和指示信息,所述指示信息用于表征所述远端设备在中继设备间切换;所述请求消息用于请求所述基站将所述远端设备由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络;The request message includes the first identifier and the indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the remote device switches between the relay devices, and the request message is used to request the base station to End device switching from being connected to the network by the first relay device to being connected to the network by the second relay device;
    所述远端设备接收所述基站返回的针对所述请求消息的响应消息;Receiving, by the remote device, a response message for the request message returned by the base station;
    所述远端设备基于所述响应消息,建立与所述第二中继设备的连接。The remote device establishes a connection with the second relay device based on the response message.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述请求消息中还包括所述第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识;所述第二标识用于所述基站确定所述第二中继设备的服务基站是否为所述基站。The method according to claim 1, wherein the request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell; the second identifier is used by the base station to determine the second Whether the serving base station of the relay device is the base station.
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二标识还用于:当所述第二中继设备处于空闲态时,管辖所述第二中继设备的核心网设备在所述第二中继设备驻留小区内进行寻呼。The method according to claim 2, wherein the second identifier is further configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the core network device that administers the second relay device is in the The second relay device camps in the cell for paging.
  4. 如权利要求1~3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述远端设备通过所述第一中继设备向基站发送请求消息之后,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein after the remote device sends a request message to the base station by using the first relay device, the method further includes:
    所述远端设备接收所述基站发送的响应消息,所述响应消息中包括所述指示信息;Receiving, by the remote device, a response message sent by the base station, where the response message includes the indication information;
    所述远端设备根据所述指示信息,复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,所述第一映射关系为所述远端设备的承载标识与所述第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,所述第二映射关系为所述远端设备的承载标载与所述第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。The remote device multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the indication information, where the first mapping relationship is a side chain between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the first relay device. The mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the road and the second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device.
  5. 一种远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for switching a remote device between relay devices, comprising:
    第一基站接收远端设备通过第一中继设备发送的第一请求消息,其中,所述第一请求消息包括第二中继设备的第一标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;Receiving, by the first base station, the first request message sent by the remote device by using the first relay device, where the first request message includes a first identifier of the second relay device and an indication for identifying switching between the relay devices information;
    所述第一基站根据所述第一请求消息,将所述远端设备由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。The first base station switches the remote device from being connected to the network by the first relay device to the network connected by the second relay device according to the first request message.
  6. 如权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一请求消息中还包括:所述第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识;所述第二标识用于所述第一基站确定所述第二中继设备的服务基站是否为所述第一基站。The method according to claim 5, wherein the first request message further comprises: the second identifier of the second relay device camping cell; the second identifier is used by the first base station Determining whether the serving base station of the second relay device is the first base station.
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二标识还用于,当所述第二中继设备处于空闲态时,管辖所述第二中继设备的核心网设备在所述第二中继设备驻留小区内进行寻呼。The method according to claim 6, wherein the second identifier is further configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the core network device that administers the second relay device is in the The second relay device camps in the cell for paging.
  8. 如权利要求5~7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一基站根据所述第一请求消息,将所述远端设备由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络,包括:The method according to any one of claims 5 to 7, wherein the first base station switches the remote device to the network connected through the first relay device according to the first request message. Connecting to the network by the second relay device, including:
    所述第一基站向第一核心网设备发送第二请求消息,所述第二请求消息中包括:从所述第一请求消息中收到的所述第二中继设备的第一标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的 指示信息;所述指示信息用于指示所述第一核心网设备:所述远端设备将由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络;The first base station sends a second request message to the first core network device, where the second request message includes: the first identifier and the second relay device received from the first request message Switching between the relays Instructing information; the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device is to be switched by the first relay device to connect to the network by the second relay device;
    或者,所述第一基站向所述第一核心网设备发送所述第二请求消息,由所述第一核心网设备向第二核心网设备发送第三请求消息,所述第三请求消息中包括:从所述第二请求消息中收到的所述第二中继设备的第一标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;所述指示信息指示所述第二核心网设备:所述远端设备将由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。Or the first base station sends the second request message to the first core network device, where the first core network device sends a third request message to the second core network device, where the third request message is And including: a first identifier of the second relay device received from the second request message, and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the indication information indicating the second core network device The remote device will be switched by the connection network through the first relay device to the network connected by the second relay device.
  9. 如权利要求5~8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一请求消息中还包括所述第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识;The method according to any one of claims 5 to 8, wherein the first request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell;
    若所述第一基站根据所述第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识确定所述第二中继设备的服务基站为所述第一基站,则所述第一基站根据所述第一请求消息,将所述远端设备由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络,包括:If the first base station determines that the serving base station of the second relay device is the first base station according to the second identifier of the second relay device camping cell, the first base station is configured according to the first And the requesting message, the remote device is switched from being connected to the network by the first relay device to the network connected by the second relay device, including:
    所述第一基站复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,所述第一映射关系为:所述远端设备的承载标识与所述第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,所述第二映射关系为所述远端设备的承载标识与所述第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系;The first base station multiplexes the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: mapping between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the first relay device The second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier between the second relay device;
    或者or
    若所述第一基站根据所述第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识确定所述第二中继设备的服务基站不是所述第一基站,则所述第二请求消息中还包含所述第一映射关系,用于所述第二基站复用所述第一映射关系到所述第二映射关系。If the first base station determines that the serving base station of the second relay device is not the first base station according to the second identifier of the second relay device camping cell, the second request message further includes The first mapping relationship is used by the second base station to multiplex the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship.
  10. 一种远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for switching a remote device between relay devices, comprising:
    远端设备通过第一中继设备连接网络;The remote device connects to the network through the first relay device;
    所述远端设备向第二中继设备发送请求消息;Sending, by the remote device, a request message to the second relay device;
    其中,所述请求消息中包括:所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;所述请求消息用于请求所述第二中继设备向所述网络发起请求,以将所述远端设备由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络;The request message includes: an identifier of the remote device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the request message is used to request the second relay device to initiate a request to the network To switch the remote device from being connected to the network by the first relay device to the network connected by the second relay device;
    所述远端设备接收基站发送的响应消息;Receiving, by the remote device, a response message sent by the base station;
    所述远端设备基于所述响应消息,建立与所述第二中继设备的连接。The remote device establishes a connection with the second relay device based on the response message.
  11. 如权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述响应消息中包括用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;The method according to claim 10, wherein the response message includes indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices;
    所述远端设备接收基站发送的响应消息之后,还包括:所述远端设备根据所述响应消息,复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,所述第一映射关系为:所述远端设备的承载标识与所述第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,所述第二映射关系为所述远端设备的承载标载与所述第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。After receiving the response message sent by the base station, the remote device further includes: the remote device multiplexing the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the response message, where the first mapping relationship is: the far a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the end device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is between the bearer label of the remote device and the second relay device The mapping relationship between the side link bearer identifiers.
  12. 一种远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法,所述远端设备通过第一中继设备连接网络,其特征在于,包括:A method for the remote device to switch between the relay devices, where the remote device is connected to the network by using the first relay device, and the method includes:
    第二中继设备接收所述远端设备发送的第一请求消息,所述第一请求消息中包括:所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;The second relay device receives the first request message sent by the remote device, where the first request message includes: an identifier of the remote device and indication information used to identify a handover between the relay devices;
    所述第二中继设备根据所述第一请求消息,向所述网络发起请求,以将所述远端设备由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。The second relay device initiates a request to the network according to the first request message, to switch the remote device from being connected to the second relay device by using the first relay device Connect Network.
  13. 如权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二中继设备根据所述第一请求 消息,向所述网络发起请求,包括:The method of claim 12, wherein said second relay device is responsive to said first request a message to initiate a request to the network, including:
    若服务所述第一中继设备的核心网设备为第一核心网设备,服务所述第二中继设备的核心网设备为第二核心网设备,则所述第二中继设备向所述第二核心网设备发送第二请求消息,所述第二请求消息中包括:从所述第一请求消息中收到的所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;所述第二请求消息用于所述第二核心网设备向第一核心网设备发送第三请求消息,所述第三请求消息中包括:从所述第二请求消息中收到的所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述第一核心网设备:所述远端设备将由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络;或者,If the core network device serving the first relay device is the first core network device, and the core network device serving the second relay device is the second core network device, the second relay device is The second core network device sends a second request message, where the second request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the first request message, and an indication for identifying a handover between the relay devices. The second request message is used by the second core network device to send a third request message to the first core network device, where the third request message includes: a location received from the second request message The identifier of the remote device and the indication information for identifying the handover between the relay devices, the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device is to be connected by the first relay device Switching the network to the network connected by the second relay device; or
    若服务所述第一中继设备和服务所述第二中继设备的核心网设备均为第一核心网设备,则所述第二中继设备向所述第一核心网设备发送所述第二请求消息,所述第二请求消息中包括:从所述第一请求消息中收到的所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述第一核心网设备:所述远端设备将由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。If the first relay device serving the first relay device and the core network device serving the second relay device are both the first core network device, the second relay device sends the first relay device to the first core network device. And a second request message, where the second request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the first request message, and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the indication information is used by Instructing the first core network device: the remote device will be switched by the first relay device connection network to be connected to the network by the second relay device.
  14. 一种远端设备在中继设备间切换的方法,所述远端设备通过第一中继设备连接网络,其特征在于,包括:A method for the remote device to switch between the relay devices, where the remote device is connected to the network by using the first relay device, and the method includes:
    若服务所述第一中继设备的核心网设备为第一核心网设备,服务第二中继设备的核心网设备为第二核心网设备,则:If the core network device serving the first relay device is the first core network device, and the core network device serving the second relay device is the second core network device, then:
    所述第二核心网设备接收所述第二中继设备在收到第一请求消息后发送的第二请求消息,所述第二请求消息中包括所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;The second core network device receives a second request message that is sent by the second relay device after receiving the first request message, where the second request message includes the identifier of the remote device and is used to identify Indication information for switching between relay devices;
    所述第二核心网设备向所述第一核心网设备发送第三请求消息,所述第三请求消息中包括:从所述第二请求消息中收到的所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述第一核心网设备:所述远端设备将由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络;The second core network device sends a third request message to the first core network device, where the third request message includes: identifier and usage of the remote device received from the second request message And indicating indication information for switching between the relay devices, where the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device is to be switched by the first relay device connection network to the second The relay device is connected to the network;
    若服务所述第一中继设备和服务所述第二中继设备的核心网设备均为第一核心网设备,则:If the first relay device serving the first relay device and the core network device serving the second relay device are both the first core network device, then:
    所述第一核心网设备接收所述第二中继设备在收到第一请求消息后发送的第二请求消息,所述第二请求消息中包括所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;The first core network device receives a second request message that is sent by the second relay device after receiving the first request message, where the second request message includes an identifier of the remote device and is used to identify Indication information for switching between relay devices;
    所述第一核心网设备向所述第二中继设备的服务基站发送第四请求消息,所述第四请求消息用于指示所述第二中继设备的服务基站:获取第一映射关系,复用所述第一映射关系到第二映射关系,所述第一映射关系为:所述远端设备的承载标识与所述第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,所述第二映射关系为所述远端设备的承载标载与所述第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。The first core network device sends a fourth request message to the serving base station of the second relay device, where the fourth request message is used to indicate that the serving base station of the second relay device acquires the first mapping relationship. And multiplexing the first mapping relationship with the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: a mapping relationship between a bearer identifier of the remote device and a side link bearer identifier between the first relay device, where The second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device.
  15. 如权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二核心网设备向所述第一核心网设备发送第三请求消息之后,还包括:The method according to claim 14, wherein after the second core network device sends the third request message to the first core network device, the method further includes:
    所述第二核心网设备接收所述第一核心网设备返回的响应消息;Receiving, by the second core network device, a response message returned by the first core network device;
    所述第二核心网设备向所述第二中继设备的服务基站发送第五请求消息,所述第五请求消息中包括所述第二中继设备的标识,所述第二中继设备的标识用于指示所述服务基 站:所述远端设备将切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。The second core network device sends a fifth request message to the serving base station of the second relay device, where the fifth request message includes an identifier of the second relay device, where the second relay device Identification is used to indicate the service base Station: The remote device will switch to connect to the network by the second relay device.
  16. 一种切换装置,应用于远端设备,其特征在于,所述装置包括:A switching device is applied to a remote device, wherein the device comprises:
    通信单元,用于通过第一中继设备连接网络;a communication unit, configured to connect to the network by using the first relay device;
    处理单元,用于获取第二中继设备的第一标识;a processing unit, configured to acquire a first identifier of the second relay device;
    所述通信单元,还用于通过所述第一中继设备向基站发送请求消息;The communication unit is further configured to send a request message to the base station by using the first relay device;
    其中,所述请求消息中包括所述第一标识和指示信息,所述指示信息用于表征所述远端设备在中继设备间切换;所述请求消息用于请求所述基站将所述远端设备由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络;The request message includes the first identifier and the indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that the remote device switches between the relay devices, and the request message is used to request the base station to End device switching from being connected to the network by the first relay device to being connected to the network by the second relay device;
    所述通信单元,还用于接收所述基站返回的针对所述请求消息的响应消息;The communication unit is further configured to receive a response message returned by the base station for the request message;
    所述处理单元,还用于基于所述响应消息,建立与所述第二中继设备的连接。The processing unit is further configured to establish a connection with the second relay device based on the response message.
  17. 如权利要求16所述的装置,其特征在于,所述请求消息中还包括所述第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识;所述第二标识用于所述基站确定所述第二中继设备的服务基站是否为所述基站。The apparatus according to claim 16, wherein the request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell; the second identifier is used by the base station to determine the second identifier Whether the serving base station of the relay device is the base station.
  18. 如权利要求17所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二标识还用于:当所述第二中继设备处于空闲态时,管辖所述第二中继设备的核心网设备在所述第二中继设备驻留小区内进行寻呼。The device according to claim 17, wherein the second identifier is further configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the core network device that administers the second relay device is in the The second relay device camps in the cell for paging.
  19. 如权利要求16~18任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元,还用于接收所述基站发送的响应消息,所述响应消息中包括所述指示信息;The device according to any one of claims 16 to 18, wherein the communication unit is further configured to receive a response message sent by the base station, where the response message includes the indication information;
    所述处理单元,还用于根据所述指示信息,复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,所述第一映射关系为所述装置的承载标识与所述第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,所述第二映射关系为所述装置的承载标载与所述第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。The processing unit is further configured to: multiplex the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the indication information, where the first mapping relationship is a side between the bearer identifier of the device and the first relay device The mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the link and the second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer label of the device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device.
  20. 一种切换装置,应用于第一基站,其特征在于,包括:A switching device is applied to a first base station, and includes:
    通信单元,用于接收远端设备通过第一中继设备发送的第一请求消息,其中,所述第一请求消息包括第二中继设备的第一标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;a communication unit, configured to receive a first request message sent by the remote device by using the first relay device, where the first request message includes a first identifier of the second relay device and is used to identify that the device is switched between the relay devices Instructions;
    处理单元,用于根据所述第一请求消息,将所述远端设备由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。And a processing unit, configured to switch, according to the first request message, the remote device from the first relay device connection network to the second relay device to connect to the network.
  21. 如权利要求20所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一请求消息中还包括:所述第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识;所述第二标识用于所述处理单元确定所述第二中继设备的服务基站是否为所述装置。The apparatus according to claim 20, wherein the first request message further comprises: the second identifier of the second relay device camping on the cell; the second identifier is used by the processing unit to determine Whether the serving base station of the second relay device is the device.
  22. 如权利要求21所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二标识还用于,当所述第二中继设备处于空闲态时,管辖所述第二中继设备的核心网设备在所述第二中继设备驻留小区内进行寻呼。The device according to claim 21, wherein the second identifier is further configured to: when the second relay device is in an idle state, the core network device that administers the second relay device is in the The second relay device camps in the cell for paging.
  23. 如权利要求20~22任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元具体用于:The device according to any one of claims 20 to 22, wherein the processing unit is specifically configured to:
    向第一核心网设备发送第二请求消息,所述第二请求消息中包括:从所述第一请求消息中收到的所述第二中继设备的第一标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;所述指示信息用于指示所述第一核心网设备:所述远端设备将由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络;And sending, by the first core network device, a second request message, where the second request message includes: the first identifier of the second relay device received from the first request message, and the identifier used for the relay Instructing information for switching between devices; the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device will be switched by connecting the network through the first relay device to connecting to the network by the second relay device ;
    或者,向所述第一核心网设备发送所述第二请求消息,由所述第一核心网设备向第二核心网设备发送第三请求消息,所述第三请求消息中包括:从所述第二请求消息中收到的 所述第二中继设备的第一标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;所述指示信息指示所述第二核心网设备:所述远端设备将由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。Or sending the second request message to the first core network device, where the first core network device sends a third request message to the second core network device, where the third request message includes: Received in the second request message a first identifier of the second relay device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the indication information indicating the second core network device: the remote device is to be passed by the first The device connection network is switched to connect to the network by the second relay device.
  24. 如权利要求20~23任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一请求消息中还包括所述第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识;The device according to any one of claims 20 to 23, wherein the first request message further includes a second identifier of the second relay device camping cell;
    若所述处理单元根据所述第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识确定所述第二中继设备的服务基站为所述第一基站,则所述处理单元具体用于:If the processing unit determines that the serving base station of the second relay device is the first base station according to the second identifier of the second relay device camping cell, the processing unit is specifically configured to:
    复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,所述第一映射关系为:所述远端设备的承载标识与所述第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,所述第二映射关系为所述远端设备的承载标识与所述第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系;And multiplexing the first mapping relationship with the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and a side link bearer identifier between the first relay device, where The mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device;
    或者or
    若所述处理单元根据所述第二中继设备驻留小区的第二标识确定所述第二中继设备的服务基站不是所述第一基站,则所述第二请求消息中还包含所述第一映射关系,用于所述第二基站复用所述第一映射关系到所述第二映射关系。If the processing unit determines that the serving base station of the second relay device is not the first base station according to the second identifier of the second relay device camping cell, the second request message further includes the The first mapping relationship is used by the second base station to multiplex the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship.
  25. 一种切换装置,应用于远端设备,其特征在于,所述装置包括:A switching device is applied to a remote device, wherein the device comprises:
    通信单元,用于通过第一中继设备连接网络,以及向第二中继设备发送请求消息;a communication unit, configured to connect to the network by using the first relay device, and send a request message to the second relay device;
    其中,所述请求消息中包括:所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;所述请求消息用于请求所述第二中继设备向所述网络发起请求,以将所述远端设备由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络;The request message includes: an identifier of the remote device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices; the request message is used to request the second relay device to initiate a request to the network To switch the remote device from being connected to the network by the first relay device to the network connected by the second relay device;
    所述通信单元,还用于接收基站发送的响应消息;The communication unit is further configured to receive a response message sent by the base station;
    处理单元,用于基于所述响应消息,建立与所述第二中继设备的连接。And a processing unit, configured to establish a connection with the second relay device based on the response message.
  26. 如权利要求25所述的装置,其特征在于,所述响应消息中包括用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;The apparatus according to claim 25, wherein said response message includes indication information for identifying handover between relay devices;
    所述处理单元,还用于在所述通信单元接收基站发送的响应消息之后,根据所述响应消息,复用第一映射关系到第二映射关系,所述第一映射关系为:所述远端设备的承载标识与所述第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,所述第二映射关系为所述远端设备的承载标载与所述第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。The processing unit is further configured to: after the communication unit receives the response message sent by the base station, multiplex the first mapping relationship to the second mapping relationship according to the response message, where the first mapping relationship is: the far a mapping relationship between the bearer identifier of the end device and the side link bearer identifier of the first relay device, where the second mapping relationship is between the bearer label of the remote device and the second relay device The mapping relationship between the side link bearer identifiers.
  27. 一种切换装置,远端设备通过第一中继设备连接网络,所述装置应用于第二中继设备,其特征在于,所述装置包括:A switching device, the remote device is connected to the network through the first relay device, and the device is applied to the second relay device, wherein the device includes:
    通信单元,用于接收所述远端设备发送的第一请求消息,所述第一请求消息中包括:所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;a communication unit, configured to receive a first request message sent by the remote device, where the first request message includes: an identifier of the remote device, and indication information used to identify a handover between the relay devices;
    处理单元,用于根据所述第一请求消息,向所述网络发起请求,以将所述远端设备由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。a processing unit, configured to initiate a request to the network according to the first request message, to switch the remote device from being connected to the network by using the first relay device to connect to the network by the second relay device .
  28. 如权利要求27所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元具体用于:The device according to claim 27, wherein the processing unit is specifically configured to:
    若服务所述第一中继设备的核心网设备为第一核心网设备,服务所述第二中继设备的核心网设备为第二核心网设备,则所述通信单元还用于向所述第二核心网设备发送第二请求消息,所述第二请求消息中包括:从所述第一请求消息中收到的所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;所述第二请求消息用于所述第二核心网设备向第一核心网设备发送第三请求消息,所述第三请求消息中包括:从所述第二请求消息中收到的所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示 所述第一核心网设备:所述远端设备将由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络;或者,If the core network device serving the first relay device is the first core network device, and the core network device serving the second relay device is the second core network device, the communication unit is further configured to The second core network device sends a second request message, where the second request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the first request message, and an indication for identifying a handover between the relay devices. The second request message is used by the second core network device to send a third request message to the first core network device, where the third request message includes: a location received from the second request message An identifier of the remote device and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the indication information is used to indicate The first core network device: the remote device will be switched to be connected to the network by the second relay device by the first relay device connection network; or
    若服务所述第一中继设备和服务所述第二中继设备的核心网设备均为第一核心网设备,则所述通信单元还用于向所述第一核心网设备发送所述第二请求消息,所述第二请求消息中包括:从所述第一请求消息中收到的所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述第一核心网设备:所述远端设备将由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。If the first relay device and the core network device serving the second relay device are both the first core network device, the communication unit is further configured to send the first to the first core network device And a second request message, where the second request message includes: an identifier of the remote device received from the first request message, and indication information for identifying a handover between the relay devices, where the indication information is used by Instructing the first core network device: the remote device will be switched by the first relay device connection network to be connected to the network by the second relay device.
  29. 一种切换装置,远端设备通过第一中继设备连接网络,所述切换装置应用于第二核心网设备,其特征在于,所述装置包括接收单元和发送单元;其中:A switching device, the remote device is connected to the network through the first relay device, and the switching device is applied to the second core network device, wherein the device comprises a receiving unit and a sending unit; wherein:
    若服务所述第一中继设备的核心网设备为第一核心网设备,服务第二中继设备的核心网设备为第二核心网设备,则:If the core network device serving the first relay device is the first core network device, and the core network device serving the second relay device is the second core network device, then:
    所述接收单元,用于接收所述第二中继设备在收到第一请求消息后发送的第二请求消息,所述第二请求消息中包括所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;The receiving unit is configured to receive a second request message that is sent by the second relay device after receiving the first request message, where the second request message includes an identifier of the remote device and is used to identify Indication information for switching between relay devices;
    所述发送单元,用于向所述第一核心网设备发送第三请求消息,所述第三请求消息中包括:从所述第二请求消息中收到的所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述第一核心网设备:所述远端设备将由通过所述第一中继设备连接网络切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络;The sending unit is configured to send a third request message to the first core network device, where the third request message includes: identifier and usage of the remote device received from the second request message And indicating indication information for switching between the relay devices, where the indication information is used to indicate the first core network device: the remote device is to be switched by the first relay device connection network to the second The relay device is connected to the network;
    若服务所述第一中继设备和服务所述第二中继设备的核心网设备均为第一核心网设备,则:If the first relay device serving the first relay device and the core network device serving the second relay device are both the first core network device, then:
    所述接收单元,用于接收所述第二中继设备在收到第一请求消息后发送的第二请求消息,所述第二请求消息中包括所述远端设备的标识和用于标识在中继设备间切换的指示信息;The receiving unit is configured to receive a second request message that is sent by the second relay device after receiving the first request message, where the second request message includes an identifier of the remote device and is used to identify Indication information for switching between relay devices;
    所述发送单元,用于向所述第二中继设备的服务基站发送第四请求消息,所述第四请求消息用于指示所述第二中继设备的服务基站:获取第一映射关系,复用所述第一映射关系到第二映射关系,所述第一映射关系为:所述远端设备的承载标识与所述第一中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系,所述第二映射关系为所述远端设备的承载标载与所述第二中继设备间的侧链路承载标识的映射关系。The sending unit is configured to send a fourth request message to the serving base station of the second relay device, where the fourth request message is used to indicate that the serving base station of the second relay device acquires the first mapping relationship. And multiplexing the first mapping relationship with the second mapping relationship, where the first mapping relationship is: a mapping relationship between a bearer identifier of the remote device and a side link bearer identifier between the first relay device, where The second mapping relationship is a mapping relationship between the bearer label of the remote device and the side link bearer identifier of the second relay device.
  30. 如权利要求29所述的装置,其特征在于,接收单元还用于:向所述第一核心网设备发送第三请求消息之后,接收所述第一核心网设备返回的响应消息;The apparatus according to claim 29, wherein the receiving unit is further configured to: after transmitting the third request message to the first core network device, receive a response message returned by the first core network device;
    所述发送单元,还用于向所述第二中继设备的服务基站发送第五请求消息,所述第五请求消息中包括所述第二中继设备的标识,所述第二中继设备的标识用于指示所述服务基站:所述远端设备将切换到由所述第二中继设备连接网络。 The sending unit is further configured to send a fifth request message to the serving base station of the second relay device, where the fifth request message includes an identifier of the second relay device, and the second relay device The identifier is used to indicate the serving base station: the remote device will switch to connect to the network by the second relay device.
PCT/CN2017/087796 2017-04-14 2017-06-09 Switching method and switching apparatus for remote device between relay devices WO2018188185A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201710245606 2017-04-14
CN201710245606.5 2017-04-14

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018188185A1 true WO2018188185A1 (en) 2018-10-18

Family

ID=63793672

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2017/087796 WO2018188185A1 (en) 2017-04-14 2017-06-09 Switching method and switching apparatus for remote device between relay devices

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2018188185A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101841824A (en) * 2009-03-17 2010-09-22 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Method, system and relay equipment for implementing cell switch
CN102215537A (en) * 2010-04-09 2011-10-12 华为技术有限公司 Switching method, evolved Node B (eNodeB) and home gateway
CN103987090A (en) * 2013-02-07 2014-08-13 华为终端有限公司 Relay communication method and device, and relay communication system
CN105050152A (en) * 2015-07-14 2015-11-11 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 Service processing method and service processing device based on D2D (Device-to-Device) relay communication

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101841824A (en) * 2009-03-17 2010-09-22 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Method, system and relay equipment for implementing cell switch
CN102215537A (en) * 2010-04-09 2011-10-12 华为技术有限公司 Switching method, evolved Node B (eNodeB) and home gateway
CN103987090A (en) * 2013-02-07 2014-08-13 华为终端有限公司 Relay communication method and device, and relay communication system
CN105050152A (en) * 2015-07-14 2015-11-11 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 Service processing method and service processing device based on D2D (Device-to-Device) relay communication

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11374821B2 (en) Method and apparatus for performing cell specific procedure or mobility procedure for network slice-based NR in wireless communication system
US11778684B2 (en) Indicating tracking area update (TAU) while in RRC inactive state
US20230180274A1 (en) Data scheduling method, base station, and system
CN113475109B (en) Early measurement reporting with RRC resume complete like message
RU2668071C1 (en) Communication optimization method and device
US11716703B2 (en) Paging method and paging device
CN107534987A (en) A kind of data dispatching method, base station and system
US20240080750A1 (en) Mobile telecommunications system method, user equipment and base station for transmitting on demand system information
US20160150513A1 (en) Method and device for host configuration
CN113543114B (en) Communication method and device for multi-user identity module SIM card
CN107925934A (en) Processing unit, method and the communication system of network instruction
CN107371238B (en) Paging method and device
CN106961726B (en) Data transmission method, device and system
US20140335864A1 (en) Radio communication system, radio base station, radio terminal and radio communication method
WO2019105064A1 (en) Method and apparatus for signal transmission, network equipment
KR102524596B1 (en) Data forwarding method, apparatus, master base station and secondary base station
WO2022022394A1 (en) State indication method for user equipment and communication apparatus
WO2018188185A1 (en) Switching method and switching apparatus for remote device between relay devices
WO2022134070A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device and network device
WO2023213140A1 (en) Communication method, resource configuration method, device, network node, system, and medium
CN112423348A (en) Method, device and equipment for processing different network switching
US20150327111A1 (en) Method, apparatus, and system for establishing bearer
JP2017530640A (en) Method, apparatus and system using user equipment as small evolution type NodeB for small cell
KR20130056565A (en) Method and apparatus establishing direct tunnel with radio network controll apparatus, and the radio network controll apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17905596

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17905596

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1